JP6507082B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a bullet-type pachinko gaming machine.

  The pachinko game machine is provided with a main control board which controls the progress of the game, and a production control board which controls the production of the game through the control of the liquid crystal display of the game board and the features. The main control board transmits a command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board, and the effect control board determines the contents of the effect according to the command received from the main control board. There is Patent Document 1 as a document disclosing a technology related to transmission and reception of commands between the main control board and the effect control board.

JP, 2011-98143, A

  By the way, in this type of game machine, if cooperation between the main control board and the effect control board is not smoothly performed, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be lost.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is an object of the present invention to smoothly perform cooperation between a main control board and a presentation control board in a gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention controls main processing of a game and, at the same time, main control means capable of generating a plurality of types of commands including commands according to the progress of the game, and effect means for displaying at least effect images A game machine comprising: operation means; and effect control means for receiving the command generated by the main control means and controlling the effect means based on at least the received command generated by the main control means, The effect control means is a first storage means for storing a set value regarding a predetermined setting, a second storage means for storing an initial value of the set value, and a plurality of candidate images in a selected state and not. the setting image shown in distinguishable display mode and objects to be displayed on the presentation unit, and a display control means for changing the candidate image of the selected state in response to the selection operation of the operating means, wherein When the selection and confirmation operation of the operation means is performed during display of the setting image, the output control means sets the setting value of the first storage means based on the setting value candidate of the selection state at the time of the operation. In the operation of adjusting the level marker in the volume adjustment image, the volume setting information is updated when the operation of adjusting the level marker is performed , and the selection and determination operation is performed while the setting image is displayed. When a predetermined command is received regardless of whether it is a command previously generated by the main control unit, the initial value of the second storage unit is used as a new setting value in the first storage unit. a storage to Turkey provides a game machine, wherein.

  According to the present invention, cooperation between the main control board and the effect control board in the gaming machine can be smoothly performed.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the main command transmitted to the presentation control board from the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off monitoring processing of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the main control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the input control processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the prior determination table of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure electric power control processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a jackpot determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 and a normal symbol lottery determination table. It is an example of the symbol determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the special electric combination product operation mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the big winning a prize opening open mode decision table of the game machine which is shown in Figure 1. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game end processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the figure common control control processing of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the presentation control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of the presentation control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game standby control processing of the production control board of a gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special command analysis processing during game standby of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special command analysis processing during game standby of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows game command analysis processing during a game standby of a production control board of a gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the menu image display control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the screen counter and various images in the game machine shown in FIG. 1, and the relationship between a selection counter and various menu items. It is a figure which shows the main menu image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the shop setting image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the RTC setting image in the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the eco mode setting image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the debug mode setting image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the menu operation control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the menu operation control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the selection button decision processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special command analysis process in menu image display control of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special command analysis process in menu image display control of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special command analysis process in menu image display control of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the display image of the image display apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows game command analysis processing during menu image display control of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows game command analysis processing during menu image display control of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the production control board of a game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the demonstration production control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation input control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting operation control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting operation control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting operation control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting operation control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting operation control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the screen counter and various images in the game machine shown in FIG. 1, and the relationship between a selection counter and each transfer destination item. It is a figure which shows the operation main image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the character selection image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the music selection image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the volume adjustment image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the new game start image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the QR code (registered trademark) image for new games in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the portable terminal used for authentication of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the password input image (information input request | requirement image) in the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the game end image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the QR code (trademark) image for game end in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display image of the portable terminal used for authentication of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the game history image in the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the game method explanatory moving image in the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the update process of the character setting information in the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the update process of the music setting information in the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the update process of the sound volume setting information in the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the update process of the sound volume setting information in the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the selection button decision processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the selection button decision processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows control processing at the time of the customer waiting command reception of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change start time image change control processing of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the image switching control processing at the time of the special game start of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special command analysis processing during game standby of the effect control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special command analysis process in menu image display control of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special command analysis process in menu image display control of the production control board of the game machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is an example of the command execution mode determination table of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting operation control processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the selection button decision processing of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows control processing at the time of the customer waiting command reception of the production control board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the command execution aspect of the gaming machine shown in FIG.

First Embodiment
FIG. 1 is a front view of a game machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the entire configuration of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the gaming machine 1 has a substantially rectangular outer frame 60 and a glass door 50 that covers the game area 6 of the outer frame 60 in a visible manner.

  One end of the glass door 50 (the right side facing the gaming machine 1 and the left side) is connected to the outer frame 60 via a hinge mechanism 51. A lock mechanism is provided at the other end of the glass door 50 (right side facing the gaming machine 1). When the lock mechanism of the glass door 50 is unlocked by a dedicated key, the glass door 50 can be swung by the hinge mechanism 51 to open the game area 6. The glass door 50 is provided with a door opening switch 18 a that detects the opening of the glass door 50.

  Outside the part covering the game area 6 in the glass door 50, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold indicator 23, the second special symbol hold indicator 24, ordinary A symbol display device 22 and a normal symbol hold indicator 25 are provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is to notify the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed with the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 14 of the gaming area 6 (hereinafter referred to as "starting winning" as appropriate). is there. The second special symbol display device 21 is to notify the lottery result of the jackpot lottery which is triggered by the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 15 of the gaming area 6 (hereinafter referred to as "starting winning" as appropriate). . The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 variably display a plurality of types of special symbols that can be identified. The first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 are configured by seven segments of LEDs. In the following description, a special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 20 is appropriately referred to as a "first special symbol", and a special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 21 is appropriately "second special symbol Called "pattern".

  The first special symbol hold display 23 displays the number of pending changes of the first special symbol. The second special symbol hold display 24 displays the number of pending changes of the second special symbol.

  Here, the suspension of the change of the first special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition established earlier, although the start condition for executing the change of the first special symbol is satisfied by the start winning of the first start port 14 This occurs when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when the gaming machine 1 is executing a special game advantageous to the player.

  Similarly, the suspension of the change of the second special symbol is based on the establishment of the start condition established earlier, although the start condition for executing the change of the second special symbol is satisfied by the start winning of the second start port 15 This occurs when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being executed or when the gaming machine 1 is executing a special game.

  Each of the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reservations in the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24 will be specifically described. In the first special symbol hold display 23, the number of changes in the first special symbol hold is In the case of one, the left LED lights. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is two, the right LED is lit. When the number of pending changes of the first special symbol is 3, the left LED blinks and the right LED lights. When the number of pending changes in the first special symbol is four, the two left and right LEDs blink. The display mode of the number of reservations in the second special symbol hold display 24 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold display 23.

  The normal symbol display device 22 reports the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery performed with the game ball passing through the normal symbol gate 13 as a trigger. The normal symbol display device 22 variably displays a plurality of types of normal symbols that can identify each. The normal symbol hold display 25 is for displaying the number of pending changes of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold display 25 is composed of two left and right LEDs. The display mode of the number of reservations in the normal symbol hold display 25 is the same as that of the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24.

  The game area 6 of the game machine 1 has a substantially egg shape. The game area 6 is divided into a left area 6L on the left side and a right area 6R on the right side than the center in the left-right direction. At the left end of the left area 6L, rails 5a and 5b extending in an arc shape are provided at an interval slightly larger than the game balls between each other. A ball return prevention piece 5c is provided at the upper end portion of the inner rail 5b among the rails 5a and 5b.

  In the upper part of the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1, slightly on the left corner and the right corner, the left and right three illumination devices (lamps) for presentation, and the frame presentation drive which is one movable character for each left and right An apparatus (frame gimmick) 33a is provided. The left frame effect driving device 33a is pivotally mounted so as to cover the three left effect illumination devices 34. Further, the right effect drive device 33a is pivotally mounted so as to cover the three right effect illumination devices 34. Under the control of the lamp control board 140, the effect illumination device 34 effects the game by light emission. Under the control of the lamp control board 140, the frame effect driving device 33a moves with the progress of the game itself (between the position where the effect lighting device 34 is exposed and the position where the effect lighting device 34 is covered). Perform a game presentation by opening / closing operation).

  A sound output device 32 (speaker) is provided inside the three illumination devices 34 for left and right in the upper part of the glass door 50 of the gaming machine 1. Under the control of the image control board 150, the sound output device 32 performs effects of the game by sound (output of various background music (BGM) and output of sound effects).

  Below the portion covering the game area 6 in the glass door 50, an effect button 35 is provided. The effect button 35 is for changing the effect mode by the pressing operation. The effect button detection switch 35 a is provided on the effect button 35. When the effect button detection switch 35a detects that the effect button 35 has been pressed, it outputs a signal indicating that.

  At the left of the effect button 35, a cross key 39 is provided. The cross key 39 includes an upper cursor key 39A, a lower cursor key 39B, a left cursor key 39C, and a right cursor key 39D. A center key 39E is provided at a position surrounded by the upper cursor key 39A, the lower cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D.

  In the upper cursor key 39A, the lower cursor key 39B, the left cursor key 39C, and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, cross key detection switches 39a, 39b, 39c, and 39d are provided. The central key 39E is provided with a central key detection switch 39e. When it is detected that the upper cursor key 39A is pressed, the arrow key detection switch 39a outputs a signal indicating that. When it is detected that the lower cursor key 39B is pressed, the arrow key detection switch 39b outputs a signal indicating that. When it is detected that the left cursor key 39C is pressed, the arrow key detection switch 39c outputs a signal indicating that. When it is detected that the right cursor key 39D is pressed, the arrow key detection switch 39d outputs a signal indicating that. When the center key detection switch 39e detects that the center key 39E is pressed, it outputs a signal indicating that.

  On the back side of the effect button 35 in the glass door 50, a tray for storing gaming balls is provided. At the lower right of the effect button 35 in the glass door 50, the operation handle 3 is provided. The player performs a firing operation which is an operation of holding the operation handle 3 with his / her right hand and turning it clockwise.

  A touch sensor 3 a is provided in the operation handle 3. The touch sensor 3a is formed of a capacitance type proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the operation handle 3. A ball feeding solenoid 4 b is provided in a receptacle of the glass door 50. The ball feed solenoid 4b is configured of a straight forward solenoid. In the vicinity of the pivoting portion of the operation handle 3, a firing volume 3b and a firing solenoid 4a are provided. The launch volume 3b is comprised of a variable resistor. The firing solenoid 4a is composed of a rotary solenoid.

  Each of the units 3 a, 3 b, 4 a, 4 b performs an operation related to the firing of the gaming balls in the receptacle to the gaming area 6 under the control of the launch control board 160. More specifically, when the player's hand touches the operation handle 3, the touch sensor 3a supplies a touch signal indicating that to the launch control board 160. When the player's hand turns the operation handle 3, the emission volume 3 b outputs a voltage divided according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 3 to the emission control board 160. The emission control board 160 performs control to energize the emission solenoid 4a and the ball feed solenoid 4b based on the output voltage of the emission volume 3b while the touch signal is supplied from the touch sensor 3a.

  By the energization control of the launch control board 160, the ball feed solenoid 4b sends out the game balls on the tray one by one toward the launch member directly connected to the launch solenoid 4a. The firing solenoid 4a rotates the striking member. The game balls sent from the tray toward the hitting member are hit between the rails 5a and 5b by the rotation of the hitting member and guided to the rails 5a and 5b to rise. The game ball raised between the rails 5a and 5b passes the ball return prevention piece 5c, reaches the game area 6, and falls unpredictably in the game area 6.

  Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 4 a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control substrate 160. As a result, the number of shots per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) since one shot is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid 4a. That is, one gaming ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

  At the upper part of the game area 6, a decorative member 7 that influences the flow of the game ball is provided. Under the center of the decoration member 7 and under the left edge, drive devices 33b and 33c (panel gimmicks) which are movable objects are provided. Under the control of the lamp control board 140, the board effect driving devices 33b and 33c perform game effects by movement of the device itself (advancement to the center of the game area 6) as the game progresses.

  Below the left area 6L in the gaming area 6, a plurality of general winning openings 12 are provided. The general winning opening 12 is provided with a general winning opening detection switch 12 a for detecting passage of gaming balls in the general winning opening 12. When the general winning opening detection switch 12a detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the balls are paid out.

  Below the right area 6R in the game area 6, a first big winning opening 16 is provided. The first large winning opening 16 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The first large winning opening 16 is provided with a first large winning opening detection switch 16 a for detecting entry of gaming balls in the first large winning opening 16. When the first large winning opening detection switch 16a detects the entry of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  The first large winning opening 16 is provided with a first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b which is a special electric combination, and a first large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 16c for switching the opening and closing of the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b. There is. The first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b has a rectangular plate shape substantially the same size as the first large winning opening 16. The lower edge of the first large winning opening / closing door 16 b is pivotally attached to the lower edge of the first large winning opening 16. When the first large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 16c is turned off, the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b is erected substantially flush with the board of the game area 6, and the first large winning opening 16 is closed. When the first large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 16c is turned on, the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b is opened forward with the lower edge of the first large winning opening 16 as a fulcrum.

  While the first big winning opening door 16b is in the closed state, the gaming ball falling from the upper side of the first big winning opening 16 passes the front of the first big winning opening 16 as it is. Therefore, while the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b is in a closed state, the gaming ball does not enter the first large winning opening 16. On the other hand, while the first big winning opening door 16b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the first big winning hole 16 turned upward of the first big winning opening door 16b. It is guided to the side of the first large winning opening 16 by hitting the surface of the receiving tray. Therefore, while the first large winning opening opening and closing door 16b is in the open state, the gaming ball can easily enter the first large winning opening 16.

  A second big winning opening 17 is provided at the lower center of the game area 6. The second large winning opening 17 is provided with a second large winning opening detection switch 17 a for detecting the entry of the gaming ball in the second large winning opening 17. When the second large winning opening detection switch 17a detects the entry of the game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  The second large winning opening 17 is provided with a second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b which is a special electric combination, and a second large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 17c for switching the opening and closing of the second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b. There is. The second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b has a rectangular plate shape substantially the same size as the second large winning opening 17. The lower edge of the second big winning opening opening and closing door 17 b is pivotally attached to the lower edge of the second big winning opening 17. When the second large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 17c is turned off, the second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b is erected substantially flush with the board of the game area 6, and the second large winning opening 17 is closed. When the second large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 17c is turned on, the second large winning opening opening and closing door 17b is opened forward with the lower edge of the second large winning opening 17 as a fulcrum.

  While the second large winning opening door 17b is closed, the game ball falling from the upper right and upper left of the second large winning opening 17 passes directly in front of the second large opening 17 Do. Therefore, while the second big winning opening opening and closing door 17b is in a closed state, the gaming ball does not enter the second big winning opening 17. On the other hand, while the second large winning opening door 17b is in the open state, most of the game balls falling from above the second large winning opening 17 turned upward of the second large winning opening door 17b. It is guided to the side of the second large winning opening 17 by hitting the surface of the receiving tray. Therefore, while the second big winning opening opening and closing door 17b is in the open state, the gaming ball can easily enter the second big winning opening 17.

  Above the second large winning opening 17 in the lower center of the game area 6, there are a first starting opening 14 and a second starting opening 15. The first start port 14 and the second start port 15 are vertically aligned. The first starting opening 14 is provided with a first starting opening detection switch 14 a for detecting passage of gaming balls in the first starting opening 14. When the first starting opening detection switch 14a detects the passage of the gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out.

  The second starting opening 15 is provided with a second starting opening detection switch 15 a for detecting passage of gaming balls in the second starting opening 15. When the second starting opening detection switch 15a detects the passage of the gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out.

  The second start port 15 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 15 b. The open / close state of these movable pieces 15b is switched by the start opening / closing solenoid 15c. When the start-up opening and closing solenoid 15c is turned off, the pair of movable pieces 15b are in the closed state in which each is upright. When the start-up opening and closing solenoid 15c is turned on, the pair of movable pieces 15b is in an open state in which the movable piece 15b is inclined in the shape of an inverted V. The movable piece 15b constitutes an electric tulip (hereinafter referred to as "electric chew" as appropriate) as a normal electric part. While the movable piece 15b is in the closed state, most of the gaming balls falling toward the second start opening 15 from the upper left and right of the second start opening 15 hit the outer surface of the movable piece 15b and bounce off. For this reason, while the movable piece 15 b is in the closed state, the gaming ball hardly passes through the second starting opening 15. On the other hand, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, most of the gaming balls falling toward the second start hole 15 from the diagonally upper right of the second start hole 15 are guided to the inner surface of the movable piece 15b. The second start port 15 is reached. Therefore, while the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the gaming ball can easily pass through the second starting opening 15.

  A normal symbol gate 13 is provided at a position slightly above the first big winning opening 16 in the right area 6R of the game area 6. The normal symbol gate 13 is provided with a gate detection switch 13a for detecting the passage of gaming balls in the normal symbol gate 13.

  Here, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot is triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol by the start winning of the first start opening 14 and the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol by the start winning of the second start opening 15. If the lottery is executed and the jackpot is won, the corresponding special symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol according to the type of the jackpot after the variable display of the predetermined period, and this stopped symbol shows A special game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed. In the special game, the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 until the winning number of the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or the opening time reaches the specified time. The opening game is a round game for one round, and this round game is repeated for 15 times (the first round to the 15th round). There are nine types of jackpots for the gaming machine 1 as follows.

a1. The first probability variation per length This jackpot is one of those which can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In each round game of the first round to the fifteenth round of the special game when winning this jackpot, until the winning number of the first large winning opening 16 reaches the specified number (for example 9) or until 29 seconds have elapsed The first large winning opening 16 is opened and closed in an opening and closing manner of opening the first large winning opening 16 → closing the first large winning opening 16 for 2 seconds.

  If the jackpot is won, the gaming state related to the jackpot lottery after the end of the special game is the low probability gaming state (the jackpot lottery winning probability is 2/599) and the high probability gaming state (big hit lottery winning probability) In the two states of (20/599), the player is in a high probability gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, when this jackpot is won, the game state concerning the ordinary electric character (movable piece 15b) after the end of the special game, electric power support state (the movable piece 15b is frequently opened for a long time, the second starting opening Of the two states, that is, the state in which it becomes easy to win the start 15) and the non-electric chow support state (the state in which the movable piece 15b is difficult to be released), the electric chow support state becomes advantageous to the player, and the gaming state related to the special symbol is Of the two states of time shortening state (state in which the variation time of the special symbol becomes relatively short) and non-time shortening state (state in which the variation time of the special symbol becomes relatively long), the time shortening state advantageous to the player It becomes. The state relating to the ordinary electric symbol and the state relating to the special symbol are subordinate to each other, and when the state relating to the ordinary electric symbol is the electric chow support state, the state relating to the special symbol is the time shortening state. In the following description, the state in which the state related to the ordinary electric character is the electric chow support state and the state in which the special symbol relates to the time shortening state is called "time saving game state", and the state related to the ordinary electric character is not A state in which the electric chow support state and the state relating to the special symbol are the non-time shortening state is referred to as the "non-time saving game state".

  During the non-time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is 1 / 65,536, and the variation time of the normal symbol is 29 seconds, and the second starting port 15 per winning of the normal symbol lottery becomes normal. The opening time of the movable piece 15b is 0.2 seconds. In addition, during the short time game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes 65535/65536, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes 3 seconds, the movable piece 15b of the second starting opening 15 per winning of the normal symbol lottery Opening time is 3.5 seconds.

b1. 1 per first odd development
This jackpot is one of those which can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In each round game of the first and second rounds of the special game when winning this jackpot, the number of winnings of the second large winning opening 17 until the specified number (for example nine) or six seconds have passed Opening of the 2 large winning opening 17 → closing of the 2nd large winning opening 17 for 2 seconds → opening of the 2nd large winning opening 17 until the number of winnings of the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or 6 seconds have elapsed → Closing of the second large winning opening 17 for 2 seconds → Opening of the second large winning opening 17 until the number of winnings on the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or 6 seconds elapse → 2nd large of 2 seconds The second big winning opening 17 is opened and closed in the opening and closing mode of closing the winning opening 17. In addition, in each round game of the third to fifteenth rounds, opening of the second large winning opening 17 → 2 seconds until the winning number of the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or 0.052 seconds have elapsed The second large winning opening 17 is opened and closed in the opening and closing manner of closing the second large winning opening 17. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

c1. 1 per first stochastic development
This jackpot is one of those which can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In each round game of the first to third rounds of special games when winning this jackpot, the number of winnings on the second large winning opening 17 reaches a prescribed number (for example, nine) or until six seconds have elapsed Opening of the 2 large winning opening 17 → closing of the 2nd large winning opening 17 for 2 seconds → opening of the 2nd large winning opening 17 until the number of winnings of the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or 6 seconds have elapsed → Closing of the second large winning opening 17 for 2 seconds → Opening of the second large winning opening 17 until the number of winnings on the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or 6 seconds elapse → 2nd large of 2 seconds The second big winning opening 17 is opened and closed in the opening and closing mode of closing the winning opening 17. In addition, in each round game of the fourth to fifteenth rounds, opening of the second large winning opening 17 → 2 seconds until the winning number of the second large winning opening 17 reaches the specified number or 0.052 seconds have elapsed. The second large winning opening 17 is opened and closed in the opening and closing manner of closing the second large winning opening 17. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

d1. The first probability variation short jackpot This jackpot is one of those which can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. In each round game of the first to fifteenth rounds of the special game when winning this jackpot, the number of winning of the second large winning opening 17 reaches a specified number (for example, nine) or until 0.052 seconds have elapsed The second large winning opening 17 is opened and closed in an opening and closing manner of opening of the second large winning opening 17 → closing of the second large winning opening 17 for 2 seconds. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

e1. The first normal long jackpot This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is a jackpot. The mode of opening and closing of the first big winning opening 16 in the special game when winning in this jackpot is the same as that of the first probability variation length. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

f1. Second probability variation length This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. The mode of opening and closing of the first big winning opening 16 in the special game when winning in this jackpot is the same as that of the first probability variation length. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

g1. Per second probability development 1
This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. The mode of opening and closing of the second big winning opening 17 in the special game when winning in this jackpot is the same as that of 1 per first positive variation development. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

h1. Per second probability development 2
This jackpot is one of those that can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. The mode of opening and closing of the second big winning opening 17 in the special game when winning in this jackpot is the same as that of 2 per first probability variation development. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

i1. The second normal long jackpot This jackpot is one of those which can be selected when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol is a jackpot. The mode of opening and closing of the second big winning opening 17 in the special game when winning in this jackpot is the same as that of the first normal long. When the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the end of the special game is the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state.

  In the following description, per first definite variation length, per second definite variation length, per first normal length, and per second normal length are collectively referred to as “per length” as appropriate. In addition, 1 per 1st positive variation development and 1 per 2nd positive variation development are appropriately referred to as “1 per positive variation development”, 2 per 1st positive variation development and 2 per 2nd positive variation development as appropriate. It is called 2 per hit. Also, the first probability change development 1, the first probability change development 2, the second probability change development 1, and the second probability change development 2 are collectively referred to as “per development”. In addition, the first probability variation short is appropriately referred to as "short hit".

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed to determine whether the normal symbol hits or not, triggered by the establishment of the start condition of the normal symbol by passing the gaming ball of the normal symbol gate 13, and the winning symbol is won in this normal symbol lottery. In this case, the movable piece 15b, which is a normal motorized part, is in an open state over a predetermined period. While the movable piece 15b is in the open state, the gaming ball easily passes through the second starting opening 15, so that the starting condition of the second special symbol is easily established.

  At the center of the bottom of the game area 6, an out port 11 is provided. A game ball having reached the bottom of the game area 6 without entering any of the general winning opening 12, the first starting opening 14, the second starting opening 15, the first large winning opening 16, and the second large winning opening 17 Is discharged through this out port 11.

  An image display device 31 is fitted between the decorative member 7 and the first starting opening 14 in the game area 6. Under the control of the image control board 150, the image display device 31 produces a game by image display.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the image display device 31 has a left symbol 36L, a middle symbol 36C, and a right symbol 36R (hereinafter, these symbols 36L, 36C, 36R are collectively referred to as “effect symbol 36” as appropriate). Is displayed. Each of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R is, for example, "1" symbol, "2" symbol, "3" symbol, "4" symbol, "5" symbol, "6" symbol, "7" It consists of '' symbol, '8' symbol and '9' symbol. On the image display device 31, the change suspension display of the number according to the number of suspension of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. The left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are synchronized with the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to change the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. It announces the same jackpot lottery result as what the special symbol of shows. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 14 or the second starting opening 15, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R change display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 or The variable display is performed in accordance with the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21. The left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped in a combination corresponding to the special symbols stopped and displayed according to the stop display of the special symbols after the elapse of a predetermined fluctuation time. In other words, the type of jackpot notified by the special symbol that stops through variation and the type of jackpot notified by the combination of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R that stop through variation always match.

  Describing in more detail, in the image display device 31, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are, for example, in time with the start of the variation of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. , "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "8" symbol → "9" symbol → "1" symbol Start round-turn display. Then, when the jackpot is won, the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R stop the special symbol according to the stop of the fluctuation of the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21. It is stopped and displayed by one symbol combination in a plurality of types of symbol combinations associated with the types of jackpots indicated by the symbols.

  In the period from the start of fluctuation of left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C and right symbol 36R to the stop of all left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C and right symbol 36R, left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C and right symbol The 36R may reach reach. As shown in FIG. 5A, in the reach state, the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the variation display of the middle symbol 36C continues. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, in the period from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, the left symbol 36L and the right symbol 36 While shrinking, they move away toward the upper left and right corners, and development effects may be executed. Images displayed on the image display device 31 at the time of execution of the developmental effect include recorded video of singing by a plurality of characters, animation video, and the like. When the development effect is performed, the jackpot is more reliable than when the other reach effects are performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in the period from the start of the variation of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R to the stop of all the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, In some cases, suggestive rendering or speech rendering may be performed that suggests the reliability by the behavior of the character. As shown in FIG. 6, in the suggested effect and the speech effect, a character selected by the player as a main character from among a plurality of types of characters appears.

  In addition, when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped and displayed in the symbol combination of the big hit, as shown in FIG. 7, the image of the opening effect of the special game is displayed, and the progress of the subsequent game In addition, images of a round game effect and an ending effect are displayed in order.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8, when a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) elapses while the number of reservations is 0 and the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped (hereinafter referred to as customer waiting state). , A customer waiting demo image is displayed. If the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied while displaying the customer waiting demonstration image, the customer waiting demonstration image is switched to the image of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R (FIG. 4) The variable display of left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R starts.

  Further, during the movement of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, or during the special game, music corresponding to the display image of the image display device 31 is output from the voice output device 32 (speaker).

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the gaming machine 1, the main control board 110, effect control board 120, payout control board 130, power supply board 170, game information output terminal board 30, power plug 171, power switch (not shown) And a RAM clear switch (not shown). When the activation operation is performed on the gaming machine 1, power is supplied from the power supply substrate 170 to the main control substrate 110, the effect control substrate 120, and the payout control substrate 130, and the substrates 110, 120, and 130 are activated.

  There are three start operations of the gaming machine 1: normal start operation, RAM clear start operation, and menu start operation. The normal start-up operation is an operation of pressing only the power switch. The RAM clear activation operation is an operation of pressing the power switch while the RAM clear switch is pressed. When it is desired to clear the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and the sub RAM 120c of the effect control board 120 without restoring the state of the gaming machine 1 at the previous power disconnection, this RAM clear activation operation is performed. The menu activation operation is an operation of pressing the power switch while the effect button 35 is pressed. If it is desired to perform store setting, RTC setting, eco mode setting, or debugging before making the gaming machine 1 into a game-ready state, this menu activation operation is performed.

  Here, an operation other than the operation of pressing the power switch in a state where the effect button 35 is pressed may be used as the menu activation operation. For example, a dip switch may be provided on the back of the gaming machine 1 and an operation to turn on the dip switch may be used as a menu activation operation. Further, an operation of applying a probe to a predetermined terminal on the back of the gaming machine 1 may be used as a menu activation operation. Further, whether or not to display the menu image may be determined by the function of the game control program itself.

  The main control board 110 controls the basic operation of the gaming machine 1. The main control board 110 controls the progress of the game and can generate a plurality of types of commands including commands corresponding to the progress of the game. More specifically, the main control board 110 includes a one-chip microcomputer 110m, an input port (not shown), and an output port (not shown). The one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is composed of a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c.

  The input control port of the main control board 110 includes a payout control board 130, a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a gate detection switch 13a, a first start opening detection switch 14a, a second start opening detection switch 15a, and a first large winning opening detection switch. A second large winning opening detection switch 17a, a door opening switch 18a, a magnetic detection sensor 18b, and a vibration detection sensor 18c are connected.

  At the output port of the main control board 110, a payout control board 130, a start opening opening / closing solenoid 15c, a first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c, a second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special A symbol display device 21, an ordinary symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold indicator 23, a second special symbol hold indicator 24, an ordinary symbol hold indicator 25, and a game information output terminal board 30 are connected. The game information output terminal board 30 is for outputting an external output signal generated in the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of the game arcade. The game information output terminal board 30 is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of the game arcade.

  The main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b based on the input signals from the detection switches and the timer, performs arithmetic processing, and displays the display devices 20 to 22 and the display devices 23 to 25. Direct control or sending a command to another substrate according to the result of arithmetic processing. When the activation operation is performed, the main CPU 110a executes an initialization process, and after the initialization process is finished and a game is possible, a jackpot random number value (random number value in a random number range of 0 to 599), Special symbol random number value (random number value of random number range of 0 to 99), random value for reach judgment (random number value of random number range of 0 to 99), random number value of special figure variation (random number value of random number range of 0 to 99) , Normal symbol random number value (random number value of random number range of 0 to 65535), etc. While updating various random number values within each random number range, variation of special symbol, variation of normal symbol, and games such as special games Control the progression.

  Data such as a game control program is stored in the main ROM 110 b of the main control board 110. The main ROM 110b has a jackpot determination table for the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, a collision determination table for the normal symbol display device 22, a symbol determination table, a special electric combination product operation mode determination table, and a big winning opening open mode determination table Various tables such as a variation pattern determination table and a prior determination table are stored. Details of these tables will be described later.

  The main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the main CPU 110a. The main RAM 110c has a special drawing special power processing data storage area, a general drawing general power processing data storage area, a number of normal symbol holdings (G) storage area, a normal symbol holding storage area, a normal symbol data storage area, a first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area, second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, first special symbol random number storage area, second special symbol random number storage area, number of operations (R) storage area, number of opening (K) storage Area, winning a prize opening ball number (C) storage area, high probability game flag storage area, time short game flag storage area, high probability game frequency (X) counter, time reduction frequency (J) counter, game state buffer, stop symbol data Various storage areas such as a storage area, a transmission data storage area for effect, a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, and an auxiliary game timer counter are provided. Here, at the time of power interruption, the data in the used area of the main RAM 110c is added with a checksum and backed up by the backup power supply, and at the time of power restoration, the data backed up by the backup power supply is recovered through a data check by the checksum. It is supposed to get.

  The power supply substrate 170 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 and supplies a disconnection detection signal indicating whether or not the power supply voltage has become equal to or less than a predetermined value to the main control substrate 110 and the effect control substrate 120. The power supply substrate 170 has a backup power supply made of a capacitor. The power supply substrate 170 sets the disconnection detection signal to the high level while the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value, and sets the disconnection detection signal to the low level when the power supply voltage becomes lower than the predetermined value.

  The effect control board 120 controls various effects. The effect control board 120 receives a command generated by the main control board 110 and displays an image to be executed on the image display device 31 based on the received command, a sound output to be executed on the audio output device 32, and a frame effect It is possible to change the operation performed in the drive device 33a and the drive devices 33b and 33c for board effect, or the content of blinking performed in the illumination device 34 for effect. More specifically, the effect control board 120 is communicably connected to the main control board 110 in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. The effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 120 a, a sub ROM 120 b, a sub RAM 120 c, and an RTC 120 d. The RTC 120 d outputs a time signal indicating the current date and time to the sub CPU 120 a. The RTC 120 d operates with the supplied power when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, and operates with the power of a backup power supply mounted on the power supply substrate 170 when the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

  The sub CPU 120a reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 120b based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110 and the input signal from the timer, performs arithmetic processing, and lights the corresponding command based on the processing. It is transmitted to the control board 140 and the image control board 150. The sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process when the start operation is performed, and after the initialization process is completed and a game is possible, the effect random number value (random number value in a random number range of 0 to 99), etc. The effect according to the progress of the game is controlled while updating various random number values including R within each random number range.

  The sub ROM 120 b of the effect control board 120 stores data such as an effect control program. In the sub ROM 120b, tables such as a symbol effect pattern determination table and a command execution mode determination table are stored. Details of these tables will be described later. The sub RAM 120c of the effect control board 120 functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 120a. In the sub RAM 120c, the effect first reserve (Us 1) storage area, effect second reserve (Us 2) storage area, reserve data storage area, effect pattern storage area, symbol variation effect pattern storage area, gaming state storage area, effect pattern storage Various storage areas such as areas are provided.

  FIG. 9 is a view showing main commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. As shown in FIG. The command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 is composed of a total of 2 bytes of 1 byte of MODE data indicating the type of command and 1 byte of DATA data indicating the content of the command.

  The "symbol designation command" such as "loss symbol designation command", "first definite variation per symbol designation command", "first definite variation per development symbol designation command" is the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display This is a command for designating a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the device 21.

  "The first special symbol hold number specification command" such as "the first special symbol hold number 0 specification command", "the first special symbol hold number 1 specification command" is a command that indicates the hold number of the variation of the first special symbol is there. The "second special symbol hold number specification command" such as "second special symbol hold number 0 specification command" and "second special symbol hold number 1 specification command" is a command that indicates the hold number of variation of the second special symbol is there. In the following description, the "first special symbol hold number designation command" and the "second special symbol hold number designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special symbol hold number designation command" as appropriate.

  The "variable stop command" is a command indicating that the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The “power on designation command” is a command indicating that the main control board 110 is powered on. The "RAM clear designation command" is a command indicating that the information in the main RAM 110c has been cleared. The “power recovery 1 specification command”, “power recovery 2 specification command”, “power recovery 3 specification command”, and “power recovery 4 specification command” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “power recovery specification command” as appropriate) , Is a command indicating that the main control board 110 is powered on again. The “power recovery 1 specified command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power recovery is “the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state”. The “power recovery 2 designation command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power recovery is “the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state”. The “power recovery 3 specified command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power recovery is “high probability gaming state and non-short time gaming state”. The “power recovery 4 specified command” indicates that the gaming state at the time of power recovery is “high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state”.

  The “wait for customer designation command” is a command indicating that the customer wait state is entered.

  The “1st special symbol variation start command” such as “1st special symbol variation start 1 variation start command” and “1st special symbol variation start 2 variation start command” is the first in the first special symbol display device 20 1) It is a command that indicates that the change of special symbol is started. The "second special symbol variation start command" such as "second special symbol variation start 11 variation start command" and "second special symbol variation start 12 variation start command" is the second special symbol display device 21 (2) It is a command indicating that the change of the special symbol is started. In the following description, the "first special symbol variation start command" and the "second special symbol variation start command" are collectively referred to as "variation start command" as appropriate.

  The "first special symbol start prize designation command" such as "first special symbol start prize 1 designation command", "first special symbol start prize 2 designation command", etc. 1) It is a command indicating a winning of the game ball to the starting opening 14). The "second special symbol start prize designation command" such as "second special symbol start prize 11 designation command", "second special symbol start prize 12 designation command", etc. 2) It is a command showing a winning of the game ball to the starting opening 15. In the following description, the "first special symbol start winning designation command" and the "second special symbol start winning designation command" are collectively referred to as a "start winning designation command" as appropriate.

  The "round start command" such as "long open first round start command", "long long open second round start command", and "short open first round start command", each round of the special game It is a command indicating that it starts. The “opening designation command” such as “a opening designation command for a certain variable length”, a “opening designation command for a normal long hit”, and the like is a special game start command indicating that a special game has been started. The “ending designation command” is a special game end command indicating that the special game is ended.

  The “playing state 1 specification command”, the “playing state 2 specification command”, the “playing state 3 specification command” and the “playing state 4 specification command” are commands indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1. The “playing state 1 designation command” indicates that the low probability playing state and the non-time-short playing state are being made. The “playing state 2 designated command” indicates that the high probability playing state and the non-time-short playing state are selected. The “playing state 3 designation command” indicates that the low probability playing state and the time saving game state are selected. The “playing state 4 designated command” indicates that it is a high probability playing state and a time saving playing state.

  The "full size error command" is a command indicating that a full size error has occurred. The dish filling error occurs when the delivery control board 130 outputs a command indicating that the tray 40 is full. The “counter case error command” is a command indicating that a counter case error has occurred. A counter case error occurs when a ball jam between the tray 40 and the dispensing mechanism is detected. The “counting switch disconnection error command” is a command indicating that a counting switch disconnection error has occurred. The counting switch disconnection error occurs when it is detected that the wiring between the dispensing control board 130 and the dispensing device relay terminal board or the wiring between the dispensing device relay terminal board and the dispensing mechanism section is disconnected.

  The "ballless error command" is a command indicating that a ballless error has occurred. The no ball error occurs when the payout control board 130 outputs a command indicating that the payout device has no gaming ball. The “overdelivery error command” is a command indicating that an overdelivery error command has occurred. The overdelivery error occurs when it is detected that overdelivery is being performed (the dispensing device has made more than the required number of dispensing). The “dispense command error command” is a command indicating that a payout command error has occurred. The payout command error occurs when it is detected that there is an abnormality in the number-of-payouts designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 to the payout control board 130.

  The “door open error command” is a command indicating that a door open error has occurred. The door opening error occurs when the door opening switch 18 a detects the opening of the glass door 50. The “switch non-connection error command” is a command indicating that a switch non-connection error has occurred. The switch non-connection error, general winning a prize opening detection switch 12a, gate detection switch 13a, the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the second movement opening detection switch 15a, the first large winning opening detection switch 16a, and the second large winning opening detection This occurs when disconnection or connection failure in any of the switches 17a is detected.

  The “abnormal winning error command” is a command indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred. In the abnormal winning error, the second start opening detection switch 15a detects a start winning combination of the second start opening 15 after 1.200 seconds have elapsed since the movable piece 15b of the second start opening 15 is closed. When the second large winning opening detection switch 17a detects a winning to the second large winning opening 17 when the movable piece 17b of the second large winning opening 17 is not operating, or the first large winning opening 16 This occurs when a start winning for the first large winning opening 16 is detected by the first large winning opening detection switch 16a when the first large winning opening door 16b is not operating.

  The “ejection error command” is a command indicating that an ejection error has occurred. The discharge error is determined by the number of gaming balls that have passed through the switches 12a, 14a, 15a, 16a, 17a of the winning openings 12, 14, 15, 16, 17 and the number of ball balls that have passed through the frame count switch (not shown) Occurs when the error of exceeds a predetermined number.

  The “magnet detection error command” and the “vibration detection error command” are fraud generation commands that indicate that a fraud has occurred. A magnet detection error occurs when the magnetism detection sensor 18b detects magnetism. The vibration detection error occurs when the vibration detection sensor 18 c detects the vibration of the gaming machine 1.

  "Dish full tank error elimination command" is a command indicating that the full space error has been eliminated. The “counter case error elimination command” is a command indicating that the counter case error has been eliminated. The “counting switch disconnection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the counting switch disconnection error has been eliminated. The "ball-less error elimination command" is a command indicating that the ball-less error elimination command is used to indicate that the ball-less error has been eliminated. The “overdelivery error cancellation command” is a command indicating that the overdelivery error has been eliminated. The “dispensing command error elimination command” is a command indicating that the dispensing command error has been eliminated. The “door opening error elimination command” is a command indicating that the door opening error has been eliminated. The “switch non-connection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the switch non-connection error has been eliminated. The “abnormal winning error canceling command” is a command indicating that the abnormal winning error has been eliminated. The “discharge error cancellation command” is a command indicating that the discharge error has been canceled. The “magnet detection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the magnet detection error has been eliminated. The “vibration detection error elimination command” is a command indicating that the vibration detection error has been eliminated.

  Here, among the above commands, a symbol designation command, a special symbol hold number designation command, a fluctuation stop command, a customer wait designation command, a fluctuation start command, a start winning designation command, a round start command, an opening designation command, an ending designation command, The game state designation command is a command related to the progress of the game on the main control board 110. In the following description, these commands will be referred to as "game commands" as appropriate.

  Power on specification command, RAM clear specification command, power recovery specification command, countersink error command, counter case error command, counting switch disconnection error command, no ball error command, overdelivery error command, payout command error command, door open error Command, switch not connected error command, abnormal winning error command, ejection error command, magnet detection error command, vibration detection error command, counter full error elimination command, counter case error elimination command, counting switch disconnection error elimination command, no ball error elimination Command, overdelivery error cancellation command, withdrawal command error cancellation command, door opening error cancellation command, switch non-connection error cancellation command, abnormal winning error cancellation command, discharge error cancellation command Command, the magnet detection error eliminating command, and a vibration detection error eliminating command is a game progress unrelated special commands in the main control board 110. In the following description, these commands will be referred to as "special commands" as appropriate.

  In FIG. 3, a payout control board 130 is for performing payout control of the gaming balls. The payout control board 130 is bi-directionally communicably connected to the main control board 110. The payout control board 130 includes a one-chip microcomputer composed of a payout CPU, a payout ROM, and a payout RAM (not shown). On the input side of the payout control board 130, a payout ball counting switch 132 for detecting whether or not the gaming ball has been dispensed, a ball presence detection switch 133 for detecting whether or not the gaming device has the gaming ball, and a receptacle 40 A bowl full tank detection switch 134 is connected to detect whether or not the game ball of the game room is full (whether it is overflowing or not). On the output side of the payout control board 130, the payout motor 131 of the payout device for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls from the storage portion of the gaming balls is connected. The payout CPU of the payout control board 130 reads out the program stored in the payout ROM based on the input signal from the timer and performs arithmetic processing, and transmits the corresponding command to the main control board 110 based on the processing. Do. Further, the payout CPU reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM based on the number-of-payouts designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 and performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to carry out a predetermined game. Pay out the ball. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the payout CPU.

  The payout CPU of the payout control board 130 transmits a command indicating that the gaming balls have been paid out to the main control substrate 110 when it is detected that the gaming balls have been paid out by the payout ball counting switch 132. Also, when there is an abnormality in the number-of-payouts designation command received from the main control board 110, a command indicating that there is an abnormality in the number-of-disbursements specified command is transmitted to the main control board 110. Also, when the number of dispensed balls detected by the dispensed ball counting switch 132 is larger than the number of payouts indicated by the number-of-dispenses specified command received from the main control board 110, a command indicating overdelivery is sent to the main control board 110 Do. Further, when the ball presence detection switch 133 detects that the payout device has no game ball, the payout CPU transmits a command indicating that the game ball is not present in the payout device to the main control board 110. Further, the payout CPU detects that the gaming ball is overflowing from the tray 40 (more specifically, the state where the gaming ball is accumulated in the ball flow path guiding the gaming ball from the payout device to the tray 40 is detected (If it is received), transmits a command indicating that the tray 40 is full to the main control board 110.

  The lamp control board 140 controls the frame effect driving device 33a, the panel effect effect driving devices 33b and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34. The lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120, the frame effect driving device 33a, the board effect driving devices 33b and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34. The lamp control board 140 controls, based on various commands transmitted from the effect control board 120, energization control of drive sources such as solenoids and motors for operating the frame effect driving device 33a and the panel effect driving devices 33b and 33c. The lighting control of the light in the lighting device 34 and the driving control of the motor for changing the irradiation direction of the light are performed.

  The image control board 150 controls the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32. The image control board 150 can change the content of the display image of the image display device 31 and the sound output of the sound output device 32 based on the control of the effect control board 120. More specifically, the image control board 150 is communicably connected to the effect control board 120 in both directions. The image control board 150 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, and an acoustic DSP, which are not shown. The CPU of the image control board 150 executes a program stored in the ROM while using the RAM as a work area. When the command is transmitted from the effect control board 120, the CPU controls the operation of the VDP and the sound DSP by generating a control signal according to the content of the command and outputting the control signal to the VDP and the sound DSP.

  The VDP of the image control board 150 is an image ROM for storing material data necessary for generating an image, a drawing engine for executing drawing processing of an image, and an output for outputting an image drawn by the drawing engine to the image display device 31 It has a circuit. The drawing engine draws an image in a frame buffer using material data stored in the image ROM based on a control signal from the CPU. The output circuit outputs the image drawn in the frame buffer to the image display device 31 at a predetermined timing.

  The sound DSP of the image control board 150 is connected to a sound ROM for storing various sound data relating to music, voice, sound effects and the like, and an SDRAM used as a work area for data processing by the sound DSP. The sound DSP reads sound data corresponding to the control signal from the CPU from the sound ROM to the SDRAM to execute data processing, and amplifies the sound signal obtained by this data processing with a gain corresponding to the control signal from the CPU And outputs the amplified sound signal to the audio output device 32.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 110 of the gaming machine 1. The main process is that power is supplied from the power supply board 170 to the main control board 110 by the start operation (normal start operation, RAM clear start operation, or menu start operation) and a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 Is triggered by

  In FIG. 10, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process (S10). In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a reads and executes a game control program from the main ROM 110b in response to power on. In the initialization process, the main CPU 110a stores it in the main RAM 110c in the on / off of the RAM clear switch (not shown) on the back of the gaming machine 1 at the time of power on and in the power off monitoring process (S20) at the previous power interruption. Whether or not data recovery is necessary is determined based on the power failure occurrence information backed up and the contents of the checksum, and when it is determined that recovery is not required, the main RAM 110c is cleared and recovery is determined to be required. In the case, the data in the main RAM 110c is recovered. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a power off monitoring process (S20). In the power-off monitoring process, the main CPU 110a monitors whether or not the power-off of the gaming machine 1 has occurred, and when the power-off has occurred, the firing mechanism (touch sensor 3a, firing volume 3b, firing solenoid 4a, And stop the launch of the game ball by the ball feed solenoid 4b), clear the output port, stop the payout of the game ball by the payout device, create and save the check sum in each storage area of the main RAM 110c, and power off event information After performing a series of processing of setting, the access to the main RAM 110c is set to be prohibited to prepare for power-off. The details of the power-off monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs game random number value update processing (S30). In the gaming random number updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation random number value. Next, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number value update processing (S40). In the initial random number update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number, the normal symbol initial random number, and the special symbol initial random number.

  After this, the main CPU 110a repeats the loop processing of step S20 to step S40. Further, in addition to this loop processing, the main CPU 110a executes timer interrupt processing each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit. Details of this timer interrupt process will be described later.

  11 and 12 are flowcharts showing the details of the initialization process (S10) of FIG. In FIG. 11, after the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 performs a security check on the main CPU 110a, the main CPU 110a performs a process of waiting for 2000 ms (S10-1).

  Next, the main CPU 110a permits access to the main RAM 110c (S10-2). Next, the main CPU 110a sets the serial communication port (S10-3). Next, the main CPU 110a sets a watchdog timer (S10-4). Here, the watchdog timer monitors whether or not the one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 operates normally in accordance with the game control program. When an abnormality occurs in the game control program and the game control program being executed is interrupted or stopped, or when only loop processing is repeatedly executed so that another game processing is not executed after interruption of the program execution, When the timer count unit of the watchdog timer counts up during the stop state or the standby state due to the loop processing, the one-chip microcomputer 110m of the main control board 110 is forcibly initialized.

  After that, the main CPU 110a performs an error determination process (S10-5). In the error determination process, the main CPU 110a determines whether an error has occurred, and transmits an error command of the generated error to the effect control board 120 when determining that an error has occurred. Here, the reason for determining an error in the initialization process is as follows. Among the errors, there are some errors that are difficult to eliminate in the state where the gaming machine 1 is operated. If such an error has occurred at the time of activation of the gaming machine 1, it is preferable to notify the occurrence of the error before the gaming machine 1 finishes the initialization processing and shifts to the customer waiting state. From the above reasons, in the gaming machine 1, it is decided that an error is determined in the initialization process.

  Next, the main CPU 110a transmits a power on designation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-6). After that, the main CPU 110a outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control board 160, whereby the game ball by the launch mechanism (a launch mechanism consisting of the touch sensor 3a, the launch volume 3b, the launch solenoid 4a, and the ball feed solenoid 4b) The launch is set to be enabled (S10-7).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RAM clear switch (not shown) on the back of the gaming machine 1 is pressed (S10-8). When the RAM clear activation operation is performed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and when the other activation operation is performed, the determination result of this step is "No". When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S10-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-14. If the RAM clear switch is off (S10-8: No), the process proceeds to step S10-9.

  In step S10-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power failure occurrence information is normal. If the power-off occurrence information is not normal (S10-9: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-14. If the power-off occurrence information is normal (S10-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-10.

  In step S10-10, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum of the data in the use area of the main RAM 110c, and proceeds to the next step S10-11. In step S10-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. More specifically, main CPU 110a calculates from the checksum calculated in step S10-10 and the data within the use area of main RAM 110c at that time in the power-off monitoring process (S20) at the time of the previous power failure. Check the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c, and if both match, determine that the checksum is normal (backup is valid and data recovery is possible), and if both do not match, the checksum is not normal (backup Is not effective and data recovery is impossible). When the checksum is not normal (S10-11: No), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-14. If the checksum is normal (S10-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S10-12.

  In step S10-12, the main CPU 110a performs setting of the main RAM 110c when the backup is effective. After execution of step S10-12, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S10-13. In step S10-13, the main CPU 110a transmits one of the power recovery 1 designation command, the power recovery 2 designation command, the power recovery 3 designation command, and the power recovery 4 designation command to the effect control board 120. More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the high probability game flag storage area and the short time game flag storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the high probability game flag is not set and the time short game flag is not set (previous time If the gaming state at the time of power interruption is the low probability gaming state and the non-short time gaming state), the power recovery 1 designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Also, when the high probability game flag is not set and the short time game flag is set (when the gaming state at the time of the previous power off is the low probability game state and the short time game state), the power recovery 2 designation command Is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Further, when the high probability game flag is set and the short time game flag is not set (when the gaming state at the time of the previous power off is the high probability game state and the non-short time game state), the power recovery 3 designated command Is transmitted to the effect control board 120. In addition, when the high probability game flag is set and the short time game flag is set (when the gaming state at the time of the last disconnection is the high probability game state and the short game state), the power recovery 4 designated command Transmit to the effect control board 120. After the end of step S10-13, the initialization process ends.

  In step S10-14, the main CPU 110a clears the use area of the main RAM 110c. By clearing the use area, predetermined data in the use area (for example, various random number values and flags backed up at the previous power disconnection) are initialized.

  After execution of step S10-14, the main CPU 110a performs setting of the main RAM 110c when the backup is not effective (S10-15). After that, the main CPU 110a clears the watchdog timer (S10-16). After that, the main CPU 110a transmits a RAM clear designation command to the effect control board 120 (S10-17).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the details of the power-off monitoring process. In FIG. 13, the main CPU 110a of the main control board 110 sets the interrupt prohibition (S20-1). Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the power of the gaming machine 1 has been cut off (S20-2). Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines that the power is cut off when the power failure detection signal indicating that the power supply voltage has become equal to or less than the predetermined value is input from the power supply unit (not shown) of the power supply substrate 170. If the power failure detection signal is not input, it is determined that a power failure has not occurred.

  If the main CPU 110a determines in step S20-2 that a power failure has not occurred (S20-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-3. If it is determined that the power is off (S20-2: No), the process proceeds to step S20-4.

  In step S20-3, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt permission. After executing step S20-3, the main CPU 110a ends the current power-off monitoring process.

  In step S20-4, the main CPU 110a sets the emission of the game ball by the emission mechanism to stop by outputting an emission stop signal to the emission control board 160. Next, the main CPU 110a clears the output port (S20-5). After that, the main CPU 110a transmits a power-off designation command to the payout control board 130 (S20-6). When receiving the power-off designation command, the payout control board 130 sends back a command related to the output of the external information. The main CPU 110a receives the command relating to the output of the external information, and stores it in the main RAM 110c (S20-7).

  After execution of step S20-7, the main CPU 110a displays the data in the area of use of the main RAM 110c at that time (for example, the special figure special power process data storage area, the common figure generality process data storage area, the number of normal symbol hold (G) Storage area, normal symbol data storage area, first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area, second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, first special symbol random number value storage area, second special symbol random number value storage area , Number of operations (R) storage area, number of opening (K) storage area, large winning a prize opening number of balls (C) storage area, high probability game flag storage area, short time game flag storage area, high probability game number (X) counter , Time saving (J) counter, game state buffer, stop symbol data storage area, transmission data storage area for effects, special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter Checksums of the values of the auxiliary game timer counter, the high probability game flag storage area, and the time saving game flag storage area, and the command stored in step S20-7 are created, and the created checksum is stored in the main RAM 110c ( S20-8). Here, the checksum stored in the main RAM 110c in step S20-8 is compared with the checksum calculated from the data in the use area of the main RAM 110c at that time in the initialization processing at the next power on (see FIG. In step S10-11 of 12), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (whether the backup is valid and data recovery is possible) based on the presence or absence of a match between the two.

  After the execution of step S20-8, the main CPU 110a sets power failure occurrence information (S20-9). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a sets the access to the main RAM 110c to be prohibited (S20-10). After the execution of step S20-10, the main CPU 110a performs an infinite loop to prepare for power-off.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110. The main CPU 110 a of the main control board 110 executes timer interrupt processing every 4 milliseconds which is a generation cycle of the reset clock pulse signal in the reset clock pulse generation circuit in the main control board 110.

  In FIG. 14, when the reset clock pulse signal is generated, the main CPU 110a saves the information in the register of the main CPU 110a at that point in the stack area (S100). Next, the main CPU 110a performs time control processing (S110). The time control process is a process of updating a counter used to count various times in the main RAM 110c. In the time control process, the main CPU 110a subtracts one from each of the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the auxiliary game timer counter in the main RAM 110c.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs random number update processing (S120). In the random number updating process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot random number value, the normal symbol random number value, and the special symbol random number value. More specifically, the main CPU 110 a updates each random number counter by +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one revolution), the random number counter is returned to 0, and the respective random number values are newly updated from the initial random number value at that time. .

  After execution of step S120, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number value update processing (S130). In the initial random number update process, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot initial random number, the normal symbol initial random number, and the special symbol initial random number.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs input control processing (S200). In the input control process, the main CPU 110a is a general winning opening detection switch 12a, a first large winning opening detection switch 16a, a second large winning opening detection switch 17a, a first starting opening detection switch 14a, a second starting opening detection switch 15a, It is determined whether or not there is an input to the various switches of the gate detection switch 13a, and if there is an input, predetermined data is set. Details of the procedure of the input control process will be described later.

  After execution of step S200, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special power control process (S300). In the special figure special power control process, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the special figure special power processing data provided in the main RAM 110c according to the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, while the special symbol storage determination process (special figure special power processing Processing when data = 0), special symbol variation processing (processing when special figure special power processing data = 1), special symbol stop processing (processing when special figure special power processing data = 2), jackpot gaming processing (specially One of the five processes of the figure special power process data = 3 process and the jackpot game end process (special figure special power process data = 4 process) is selected and executed. The details of the procedure of the special figure special power control process will be described later.

  After execution of step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a general-purpose power control process (S400). In the common drawing common control process, the main CPU 110a updates the value of the common drawing common processing data provided in the main RAM 110c in accordance with the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1, while the normal symbol storage determination process (general drawing Processing when normal processing data = 0), normal symbol variation processing (processing when general drawing general processing data = 1), normal symbol stopping processing (processing when general drawing general processing data = 2), And one of the four processings of the auxiliary game processing (processing in the case of common drawing common processing processing data = 3) is selected and executed. The details of the routine of the common control routine control process will be described later.

  After execution of step S400, the main CPU 110a performs payout control processing (S500). In the payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to the general winning opening prize ball counter, the first starting opening prize ball counter, and the second starting opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c, and pays out the number of gaming balls indicated by each counter. Is generated, and this command is transmitted to the payout control board 130. When the payout control board 130 receives the payout amount designation command, the payout control substrate 130 controls the payout motor 131 of the payout device to pay out the gaming balls.

  After execution of step S500, the main CPU 110a performs data generation processing (S600). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110a is external output data, starting opening opening / closing solenoid data, first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, ordinary symbol display device data, Generate memory number specification command.

  After execution of step S600, the main CPU 110a performs an error determination process (S600). In the error determination process, the main CPU 110a determines whether an error has occurred, and sets an error command indicating the type of the occurred error in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when determining that an error has occurred. . Further, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the generated error has been eliminated, and when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, sets an error elimination command indicating the eliminated error in the effect transmission data storage area.

  After execution of step S600, the main CPU 110a performs data generation processing (S700). In the data generation process, the main CPU 110a is external output data, starting opening opening / closing solenoid data, first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, ordinary symbol display device data, Generate memory number specification command.

  After execution of step S700, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (S800). In the output control process, the main CPU 110a outputs signals of external output data, starting opening / closing solenoid data, first big winning opening / closing solenoid data, and second big winning opening / closing solenoid data created in the data generation process of S600. Perform port output processing. In addition, to turn on each LED of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, and the normal symbol display device 22, the special symbol display device data and the normal symbol created in the data generation process of the above S600. A display device output process of outputting the display device data is performed. Furthermore, a command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c to the effect control board 120 is also performed.

  After execution of step S800, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a (S900).

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the input control process (step S200 in FIG. 14). In FIG. 15, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process (S210). In the general winning a prize opening detection switch input processing, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the general winning a prize opening detection switch 12a. If no detection signal is input, the process proceeds to the next step S220. When there is an input of the detection signal, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the general winning a prize winning ball counter in the main RAM 110 c and updated.

  After execution of step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process (S220). In the special winning opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a. When there is no input of a detection signal from any of the first large winning opening detection switch 16a and the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to the next step S230. When there is an input of a detection signal from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the large winning opening prize ball counter in the main RAM 110c. Then, the number of big winning opening balls (C) in the main RAM 110c (C) storage area is updated by +1.

  After execution of step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting opening detection switch input process (S230). In the first start opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the first start opening detection switch 14a. If there is no input of the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 14a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to the next step S240. When there is an input of the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 14a, the update of the winning ball counter, the first special symbol holding number (U1) the first special symbol holding number (U1) in the storage area is less than 4 The first special symbol holding number (U1) in the storage area is less than four, the first special symbol holding number (U1) is updated, the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area (U1), first 1 Store the random number value in one of the first to fourth storage units in the special symbol random number value storage area (the storage unit with no data stored and the storage unit with the smallest number), prior judgment of the jackpot lottery And a series of processing such as a set of start winning specified command according to the judgment result, a set of special symbol hold number specification command according to the number of first special symbol hold (U1) storage number in the storage area (U1), etc. Do. Details of the procedure of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

  After execution of step S230, the main CPU 110a performs second start port detection switch input processing (S240). In the second start opening detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the second start opening detection switch 15a. If there is no input of the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 15a, the main CPU 110a proceeds to the next step S250. When there is an input of the detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 15a, the update of the winning ball counter, the second special symbol holding number (U2) the second special symbol holding number (U2) in the storage area is less than 4 Whether or not, the second special symbol holding number (U2) the second special symbol holding number (U2) in the storage area is less than 4 update of the second special symbol holding number (U2), the second (2) Storing a random number value in one of the first to fourth storage units in the special symbol random number value storage area (the storage unit with no data stored and the storage unit with the smallest number), prior determination of the jackpot lottery And a series of processing such as a set of start winning combination designation command according to the judgment result, a set of special symbol hold number specification command according to the number of hold (U2) in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, etc. Do. The procedure of the second start port detection switch input process and the procedure of the first start port detection switch input process are the same except for the difference in the data write destination.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing (S250). In the gate detection switch input process, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the gate detection switch 13a. When there is no input of the detection signal from the gate detection switch 13a, the main CPU 110a ends the current input control process as it is. When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 13a is input, the main CPU 110a generates a gate passage designation command, and sets the generated gate passage designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Further, in this case, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the normal symbol holding number (G) stored in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area is less than four. And, if the number of normal symbol holdings (G) in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area is less than 4, then the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is incremented by 1 and the normal symbol random number value is acquired The normal symbol random number value acquired is stored in one of the first to fourth storage units in the normal symbol storage area (the storage unit with no data stored and the storage unit with the smallest number).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the first starting opening detection switch input process (step S230 in FIG. 14). In FIG. 16, when the main CPU 110 a receives an input of a detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 14 a (S 230-1: Yes), the main CPU 110 a proceeds to step S 230-2. When there is no input of the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 14a (S230-1: No), the current first starting opening detection switch input processing is ended.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a adds a predetermined number (for example, three) to the starting opening prize ball counter and updates it (S230-2). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol holding number (U1) in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (S230-3). When the first special symbol holding number (U1) in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is not less than 4 (S230-3: No), the main CPU 110a performs the current first starting opening detection switch input processing finish. Also, if the first special symbol holding number (U1) in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is less than 4 (S230-3: Yes), the first special symbol holding number (U1) in the storage area The first special symbol hold number (U1) is incremented by 1 and updated (S230-4).

  After execution of step S230-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a jackpot random number value, and stores data with the smallest number with no data stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special symbol random number storage area. The obtained big hit random number value is stored in the storage unit of the data storage destination in the first special symbol random number value storage area (S230-5).

  After execution of step S230-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the special symbol random number value, and stores the acquired special symbol random number value in the storage portion of the data storage destination in the first special symbol random number value storage area (S230-6 ).

  After execution of step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure variation random number value and the reach determination random number value, and the acquired special figure variation random number value and the reach determination random number value are stored in the first special symbol random number value memory. It stores in the storage unit of the storage destination of the data in the area (S230-7).

  After execution of step S230-7, the main CPU 110a performs predetermination processing (S230-8). In this preliminary determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table of the main ROM 110b, and flags the high probability gaming flag storage area and the time saving gaming flag storage area at the time of execution of step S230-8 (when the starting condition is satisfied). And the jackpot random number value stored in the storage unit of the first special symbol random number storage area in steps S230-5 to S230-7, the special symbol random number value, the random number value for reach determination, and the special figure fluctuation randomness Based on the combination with the numerical value, the winning combination information of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol this time is determined.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a prior determination table for determining in advance the result of the jackpot lottery. The prior determination table is stored in the main ROM 110 b of the main control board 110. In the prior judgment table, big hit random number value, special symbol random number value, gaming state (short time gaming state or non short time gaming state), random number value for reach judgment, special figure fluctuation random number value, winning information, and start winning specified command Each set is referred to when the starting condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied and referred to when the starting condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied It is divided into things and stored.

  After execution of step S230-8, main CPU 110a generates a start winning combination designation command corresponding to the winning combination information determined in the prior determination process of step S230-8, and sets this start winning combination designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect. (S230-9). Thereafter, the main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol holding number (U1) in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area, and indicates the first special symbol holding number (U1) the special symbol holding number designation command Is generated, and this special symbol hold number specification command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect (S230-10).

  The start winning combination designation command and the special symbol hold number designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area are transmitted to the effect control board 120 in the output control process (S800) of the timer interrupt process. The effect control board 120 determines the content of the effect prior to the change of the special symbol based on the establishment of the starting condition of the first special symbol this time based on the description content of the start winning designation command, and designates the content of the determined effect Command is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Here, the procedure of the second starting opening detection switch input process (S240) is that the reference destination of the number of reservations in steps S230-3 and S230-4 is the second special symbol number of reservations (U2) storage area, step S230 The second special symbol random number storage area is the storage destination of the random number in -5 to S230-7, and the second special symbol random number storage area is the reference destination of the random number in step S230-8, and the step It is the same as that of the first starting opening detection switch input process (S230) except that the reference destination of the number of reservations in S230-10 is the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area.

  FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the details of the special view special power control process (step S300 of FIG. 14). In FIG. 18, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special power process data (S301). In the following step S302, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special view special power process data, and shifts the process to the special symbol storage determination process (step S310) if special view special power process data = 0. If special power processing data = 1, the processing is shifted to special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if special power processing special data processing data = 2, the processing is shifted to special symbol stopping processing (step S330), special power special processing data = If it is 3, the processing is shifted to the jackpot gaming processing (step S340), and if the special figure special power processing data = 4, the processing is shifted to the jackpot gaming ending processing (step S350).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol storage determination process (step S310 in FIG. 18). In FIG. 19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is in progress (S310-1). More specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter in the main RAM 110c, and determines that the special symbol is being variably displayed if the special symbol time counter is not 0, and the special symbol time counter is 0 If it is, it is determined that the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. The main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol storage determination process when the special symbol is being changed and displayed (S310-1: Yes). Moreover, when the change display of the special symbol is not in progress (S310-1: No), it progresses to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the second special symbol holding number (U2) in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, and the second special symbol holding number (U2) is 1 or more. Determine if there is. When the second special symbol holding number (U2) is one or more (S310-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the second special symbol holding number (U2) and updates it (S310-3). Here, the gaming machine 1 is a type in which the suspension of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized over the suspension of the variation of the first special symbol. In a gaming machine of such a type, during the time saving gaming state, even if the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, the prior determination is not performed.

  If the second special symbol holding number (U2) is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the main CPU 110a refers to the first special symbol holding number (U1) in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area And it is determined whether this 1st special symbol reservation number (U1) is one or more (S310-4).

  When the first special symbol holding number (U2) is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the main CPU 110a performs customer waiting setting processing (S310-5). In the customer waiting setting process, the main CPU 110a checks whether the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area. When the customer waiting flag is not set in the customer waiting flag storage area, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting designation command in the effect transmission data storage area and sets the customer waiting flag in the customer waiting flag storage area.

  When the first special symbol holding number (U2) is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the first special symbol holding number (U1) and updates it (S310-6). After execution of step S310-3 or S310-6, the main CPU 110a performs storage area shift processing (S310-7). In this storage area shift process, the main CPU 110a corresponds to the symbol of the first special symbol random number value storage area and the second special symbol random number value storage area from which the number of reservations has been subtracted in step S310-3 or S310-6. The following processing is performed on the processing target.

  When the main CPU 110 a subtracts the special symbol holding number (U 2) in step S 310-3, the data in the second to fourth storage units of the second special symbol random number storage area is stored one before each The data in the first storage unit of the second special symbol random number storage area is written to the zeroth storage unit which is a determination storage area. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random number value, special symbol random number value, reach determination random number value, special figure variation random number value) which have been stored in the 0th storage unit are erased It will be done.

  Further, when the main CPU 110a subtracts the special symbol holding number (U1) in step S310-6, the data in the second to fourth storage units of the first special symbol random number storage area is one before each The data is shifted to the storage unit and the data in the first storage unit of the first special symbol random number storage area is written to the 0th storage unit. By writing the data to the 0th storage unit, the random number values (big hit random number value, special symbol random number value, reach determination random number value, special figure variation random number value) which have been stored in the 0th storage unit are erased It will be done.

  After execution of step S310-7, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting flag set in the customer waiting flag storage area in the customer waiting setting process (S310-8).

  After execution of step S310-8, the main CPU 110a executes the first special symbol holding number (U1) in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area and the second special symbol holding number (U2) in the second storage area A special symbol holding number specifying command for notifying the special control holding number (U2) to the effect control board 120 is generated, and this special symbol holding number specifying command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S310-9).

  After executing step S310-9, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process (S311). In this jackpot determination process, the main CPU 110a determines the lottery result (jackpot or loss) of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the current start condition, and determines the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot and the jackpot determined A jackpot design command corresponding to the type of jackpot is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area. If it is a loss, a symbol designating command for losing is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Explaining in more detail, the main CPU 110a, in this jackpot determination process, as shown in the example of FIG. 20 (flowchart showing details of jackpot determination process), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery triggered by the establishment of the current start condition. It is determined which of "big hit" and "loss" (S311-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot lottery determination table of the main ROM 110b, and determines whether or not the flag of the high probability game flag storage area is set at the time of execution of step S311-1 and the 0th memory in step S310-8. The lottery result is determined based on the combination with the jackpot random number value stored in the part.

  FIG. 21A is a diagram showing the jackpot lottery determination table referred to in step S311-1. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the jackpot lottery determination table, each pair of the jackpot random number value and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery ("jack" or "lost") refers to when the low probability gaming state And are stored separately in the high probability gaming state.

  If the determination result in step S311-1 is "big hit" (S311-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S311-2, and if the determination result in step S311-1 is "loss" (S311-1) S311-1: No), the process proceeds to step S311-5.

  In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot symbol determination processing. In this jackpot symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b and stops the variation symbol based on the special symbol random number value stored in the zero storage unit in step S310-8. The symbol data is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the main RAM 110c. Here, the stop symbol data indicates the number of two digits ("00" to "09") corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed after the change.

  FIG. 22A is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol determination table. Each set of special symbol random number, special symbol type (type of big hit), stop symbol data, and symbol designation command in the symbol determination table for the jackpot starts the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 It is divided and stored into one to be referred to when the condition is satisfied and one to be referred to when the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied.

  The stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area in the present step S311-2 is at the determination of the big hit symbol in the special symbol stop processing, at the time of determination of the operation mode of the big winning opening in the big hit game processing, in the big hit game end processing. It is referred to when determining the gaming state. Details will be described later.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a jackpot symbol designation command corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-2 and sets the symbol designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines the gaming state at the current time (at the time of the jackpot lottery) based on the presence or absence of the flag set in the high probability gaming flag storage area and the time saving gaming flag storage area, and gaming state information indicating the determined gaming state The game state buffer is stored (S311-4). Specifically, when both the high probability game flag and the time saving game flag are not set, the main CPU 110a sets data of "00H" in the game state buffer as game state information. Further, when the high probability game flag is set and the short time game flag is not set, data of "01H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information. Further, when the high probability game flag is not set and the short time game flag is set, data of “02H” is set in the game state buffer as the game state information. If both the high probability game flag and the time saving game flag are set, data of "03H" is set in the game state buffer as game state information.

  In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a performs lost symbol determination processing. In this lost symbol determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the lost symbol determination table of the main ROM 110b to determine the stop symbol data of the stop symbol of the loss, and stores the determined stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area.

  FIG.22 (b) is a figure which shows the symbol determination table for losing. In the symbol determination table for lost, each set of special symbol type, stop symbol data, and symbol designation command is referred to when the start condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied. The second special symbol display device 21 is separately stored as one to be referred to when the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 110a generates a symbol designating command for losing corresponding to the stop symbol data determined in step S311-5, and sets the symbol designating command in the effect transmission data storage area (S311-6).

  It returns to the explanation of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process (S311), the main CPU 110a performs a variation pattern determination process (S312). In the variation pattern determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table of the main ROM 110b, and the lottery result (big hit or lose) of the big hit lottery in step S311-1 and the time-saving game flag storage area at the time of execution of step S312. Whether the flag is set, the number of pending calls (U2) or (U1) after updating in step S310-3 or step S310-6, the jackpot random number value stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-8, the random number value for reach determination And the variation pattern of the variation based on the combination of the special figure variation random value.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. The variation pattern determination table is stored in the main ROM 110 b of the main control board 110. In the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol, the type of special symbol, gaming state (short time gaming state or non short time gaming state), number of holdings, random value for reach judgment, random number value for special figure variation, variation pattern of special symbol What is referred to when the start condition of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is satisfied, and the start condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 for each type of the set and the variation start command Are stored separately as those to be referred to when

  The main CPU 110a generates a change start command corresponding to the change pattern determined in step S312, and sets the change start command in the effect transmission data storage area (S313).

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines the current gaming state based on the presence / absence of a set of flags in the high probability gaming flag storage area and the short time gaming flag storage area, and generates a gaming state designation command corresponding to the determined gaming state. The game state specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S314).

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs processing for starting variable display of the special symbol (S315). Specifically, the main CPU 110a sets, in a predetermined processing area, variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 to perform variable symbol display (flashing of the LED) of the special symbol. set. When the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data of lighting or extinguishing of the LED is created in the above-mentioned step S600, and the created data is outputted in the step S800, thereby the first special symbol display device 20 Alternatively, variable display of the second special symbol display device 21 is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets a variation time based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter (S316). The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets special figure special power process data = 1 (S317), and ends the current special symbol storage determination process. In the special figure special power control process (FIG. 18) after this, the process moves to the special symbol variation process in step S302, and the special symbol variation process is performed.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation process (step S320 in FIG. 18). In FIG. 24, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has passed (S320-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S316 and determines that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and the special symbol time counter is 0 If not, it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has not yet passed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the variation time of the special symbol has passed (S320-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S320-2. Moreover, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S320-1: No), the current special symbol variation process is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  At step S320-2, the main CPU 110a performs processing for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 110a clears the variable display data set in step S315, and sets the special symbol set in step S311-2 or S311-5 to the first special symbol display device 20 or the first special symbol display device 20. 2 Stop symbol data for causing the special symbol display device 21 to stop and display is set in a predetermined processing area (S320-2). As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets a change stop command in the effect transmission data storage area (S320-3).

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol stop time (0.5 second = 125 counter) in the special symbol time counter (S320-4). The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  Next, the main CPU 110a sets 2 to the special figure special power process data (S320-5), and ends the current special symbol variation process. In the special figure special power control process (FIG. 18) after this, the process moves to the special symbol stop process in step S302, and the special symbol stop process is performed.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop process (step S330 in FIG. 18). In FIG. 25, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol has passed (S330-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S320-4, and determines that the special symbol stop time has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and the special symbol time counter If it is not 0, it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not yet passed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the stop time of the special symbol has passed (S330-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S330-2. When it is determined that the stop time of the special symbol has not elapsed (S330-1: No), the current special symbol stop process is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game end determination process. At this time, in the short game end determination process, the main CPU 110a confirms whether or not the short game flag is set in the short game flag storage area. If the time-short game flag is not set in the time-short game flag storage area, the process proceeds to the next step S330-3. When the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the number of time saving (J) in the time saving (J) storage area is updated by 1 and the time saving after updating (J) is “0 It is determined whether or not As a result, when the time saving number (J) is “0”, the time saving game flag set in the time saving game flag storage area is cleared and then the process proceeds to the next step S330-3. If the time saving number (J) is not “0”, the process proceeds to the next step S330-3 with the time saving game flag set in the time saving game flag storage area.

  At step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game end determination processing. In the high probability game end determination processing, the main CPU 110a confirms whether or not the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area. If the high probability game flag is not set in the high probability game flag storage area, the process proceeds to the next step S330-4. If the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, the high probability game count (X) in the high probability game count (X) storage area is decremented by 1 and updated, and the high probability after the update It is determined whether or not the number of games (X) is "0". As a result, when the high probability game number (X) is 0, the high probability game flag set in the high probability game flag storage area is cleared and then the process proceeds to the next step S330-4. If the high probability game number (X) is not 0, the process proceeds to the next step S330-4 while the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area.

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a determines the gaming state at the present time based on the presence / absence of the flag set in the high probability gaming flag storage area and the time saving gaming flag storage area, and the gaming state designation command corresponding to the determined gaming state The game state specification command is generated and set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit or a lose (S330-5). If the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is lost (S330-5: No), the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special view special power process data (S330-6), and the current special symbol stop End the process. In the special figure special power control process (FIG. 18) after this, the process shifts to the special symbol storage determination process in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination process is performed.

  If the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area is a big hit (S330-5: Yes), the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special view special power process data (S330-10). Next, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state at that time, the high probability game number (X), and the time reduction number (J) (S330-11). Specifically, when the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears data of the high probability game flag storage area and the high probability game count (X) storage area. . Further, when the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area, the main CPU 110a clears the data of the time saving game flag storage area and the time saving (J) storage area.

  After execution of step S330-11, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot start preparation setting processing (S330-12). In the jackpot start preparation setting process, the main CPU 110a refers to the special motorized product operation mode determination table of the main ROM 110b, and based on the stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area, the long winning large winning opening open mode determination table It is determined to be the reference destination among the short winning large winning opening opening mode determination table, the 1 large winning opening opening mode determining table for 1 development, and the 2 large winning opening opening mode determination table for 2 per development.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a special motorized product operation mode determination table. 27 shows a long winning large winning opening opening mode determination table, a short winning large winning opening opening mode determining table, one large winning opening opening determination table for one development, and a two large winning opening opening determination table for the two per development FIG.

  The special electric symbol combination mode determination table includes the type of special symbol (type of big hit), stop symbol data, and each set of data indicating the operation mode of the big winning opening, the first in the first special symbol display device 20 It is divided and stored into what is referred to when the starting condition of the special symbol is satisfied and the reference when the starting condition of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21 is satisfied. The data showing the operation mode of the special winning opening is the data showing the maximum number of rounds of the operation in the special game, and the data showing the reference destination among the four tables forming the large winning opening opening mode determination table group of FIG. It consists of

  For each long winning large winning opening opening mode determination table, each short winning large winning opening opening mode determination table, one large winning opening opening mode determination table for one development, and two large winning opening opening mode determination table for two per development The type of big winning opening to be opened, maximum number of rounds played (R), prescribed number (maximum winning number to big winning opening in one round), start interval time before the start of one round, maximum opening number of the first round Opening time and closing time in one round opening and closing cycle, closing interval time between the end of one round and the start of two rounds, maximum number of opening times of the second round ... closing interval time after the end of 15 rounds, and ending interval time The set is stored.

  The main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the large winning opening opening determination table determined in step S330-12, generates an opening designation command (special game start command) according to the type of jackpot, and this opening A designated command (special game start command) is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S330-13).

  The main CPU 110a determines the start interval time according to the type of jackpot based on the big winning opening opening mode determination table determined in step S330-12, and sets the start interval time to the special symbol time counter (S330-14) ), End the special symbol stop processing this time. In the special figure special power control process (FIG. 18) after this, the process moves to the jackpot game process in step S302, and the jackpot game process is performed.

  FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot gaming process (step S340 of FIG. 18). In FIG. 28, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening is currently in progress (S340-1). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the number of operations (R) in the number of operations (R) storage area, and determines that the opening is in progress if the number of operations (R) is “0”. R) If it is not "0", it is determined that the opening is not in progress. If the main CPU 110a is in the process of opening (S340-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-2. If the opening is not in progress (S340-1: No), the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  At step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the start interval time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol time counter set in step S330-14 of the special symbol stop process, and determines that the start interval time has elapsed if the special symbol time counter is 0, and the special CPU time special If the symbol time counter is not 0, it is determined that the start interval time has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the start interval time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-3. Moreover, when it is determined that the start interval time has not yet passed (S340-2: No), the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot start setting processing. In the jackpot start setting process, the main CPU 110 a updates the operation count (R) by incrementing the operation count (R) in the storage area by one. Here, when the start interval time has elapsed, the operation has not been performed even once, and the number of operations (R) in the storage area is “0”. Therefore, the number of operations (R) after the update in step S340-3 is “1”.

  After execution of step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process (S340-4). In the special winning opening opening process, the main CPU 110a updates the number of opening (K) by increasing the number of opening (K) in the storage area by one. In addition, the main CPU 110a is energized to energize the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c in order to open the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b. Set the data In addition, main CPU 110a refers to the special winning opening opening mode determination table determined in step S330-12 and determines the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning in the current number of operations (R) and the number of opening (K). The opening time of the mouth 17 is obtained, and this opening time is set to the special game timer counter.

  After execution of step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs round start command transmission determination processing (S340-5). In the round start command transmission determination process, the main CPU 110a refers to the number of times of release (K) the number of times of release (K) of the storage area, and when the number of times of release (K) is 1, the number of operations (R) in the storage area A round start command (for example, the first round start command if the operation number (R) is 1) corresponding to the operation number (R) is generated, and this round start command is set in the effect transmission data storage area, The present jackpot game processing ends. Further, when the number of times of release (K) is not 1, the main CPU 110a ends the present jackpot gaming process as it is. That is, since the number of times of release (K) being 1 means the start of the round, the round start command is sent only at the start of the round.

  At step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently ending. When the main CPU 110a determines that the end is not being performed (S340-6: No), the process proceeds to step S340-7. If it is determined that the ending is in progress (S340-6: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-18.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is closing (S340-7). Specifically, the main CPU 110a does not set energization data (energization data for energizing the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17c) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. If it is determined that the winning opening is closed and energization data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, it is determined that the special opening is not closing. If the main CPU 110a is closing the special winning opening (S340-7: YES), the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S340-8. If the special winning opening is not closed (S340-7: No), the process proceeds to step S340-9.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing time has elapsed. Here, the closing time is set to the special game timer counter in step S340-10 described later. If the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has elapsed (S340-8: Yes), it proceeds to the special winning opening opening process of step S340-4 and proceeds to the special winning opening opening process and the round start command transmission determination process (S340). -5) to complete the present jackpot gaming process. When the main CPU 110a determines that the closing time has not elapsed (S340-8: No), the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  At step S340-9, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the open end condition of the special winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, when the value of the special winning opening ball counter (C) reaches the specified number (9) or the opening time per opening in the opening number (K) has elapsed, the main CPU 110a ends the opening It is determined that the condition is established. In addition, when the value of the special winning a prize entry counter (C) has not reached the specified number (9) and the open time per opening in the number of times of opening (K) has not reached the main CPU 110a. It is determined that the open end condition is not satisfied. When the main CPU 110a determines that the release end condition is satisfied (S340-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-10. When it is determined that the open end condition is not satisfied (S340-9: No), the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the main CPU 110a closes the first large winning opening opening / closing door 16b or the second large winning opening opening / closing door 17b by the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid The energization data for energizing 17c is stopped. Further, the main CPU 110a refers to the large winning opening opening determination table determined in step S330-12, and based on the current number of operations (R) and the number of opening (K), the first large winning opening 16 or The closing time (closing interval time or one closing time) of the second big winning opening 17 is set to the special game timer counter. This will close the special winning opening.

  After execution of step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one operation has ended with the closing of the special winning opening in step S340-10 (S340-11). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs one operation when the value of the special winning opening ball counter (C) reaches a specified number (9) or the opening number (K) reaches the maximum opening number. Is determined to have ended. In addition, the main CPU 110a performs one operation when the value of the special winning entrance ball counter (C) has not reached the specified number (9) and the opening number (K) has not reached the maximum opening number. Is determined to have not ended. If the main CPU 110a determines that one operation has ended (S340-11: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-12. When it is determined that one operation has not ended (S340-11: No), the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs round data initialization processing. In the round data initialization process, the main CPU 110a sets the number of opening (K) in the number of opening (K) storage area to 0 and the number of large winning opening in the number of large winning entry ball (C) storage area Set (C) to 0. That is, in the present step S340-12, the number-of-openings (K) storage area and the number-of-big-prize opening balls (C) storage area are cleared. However, in the present step S340-12, the number-of-operations (R) storage area is not cleared.

  After execution of step S340-12, main CPU 110a determines that the number of operations (R) in the operation number (R) storage area is the maximum value (specifically, the special winning opening open mode determination table determined in step S330-12). It is determined whether the maximum number of rounds played (R) has been reached (S340-13).

  If it is determined that the number of operations (R) does not reach the maximum value (S340-13: No), the main CPU 110a increments the number of operations (R) in the number of operations (R) storage area and updates it (S340) -14), The current jackpot game processing ends.

  If it is determined that the number of operations (R) has reached the maximum value (S340-13: Yes), the main CPU 110a resets the number of operations (R) in the number of operations (R) storage area to 0 (S340). 15).

  After execution of step S340-15, the main CPU 110a determines the type of jackpot based on the large winning opening opening determination table determined in step S330-12, and generates an ending specification command according to the type of jackpot. Then, the ending designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S340-16).

  After execution of step S340-16, the main CPU 110a obtains an end interval time according to the type of the big hit based on the big winning opening open mode determination table determined in the above step S330-12, and this end interval time is a special game The timer counter is set (S340-17).

  After the execution of step S340-17, or when it is determined that the ending is in progress in step S340-6 (S340-6: Yes), the main CPU 110a determines whether the end interval time has elapsed (S340- 18). Specifically, the main CPU 110a refers to the special game timer counter set in step S340-17, and determines that the end interval time has elapsed if the special game timer counter is 0, and the special game timer counter is 0. If not, it is determined that the end interval time has not yet elapsed. When the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has not yet elapsed (S340-18: No), the current jackpot game processing ends.

  If the main CPU 110a determines that the end interval time has elapsed (S340-18: Yes), it sets 4 to the special figure special power process data (S340-19), and ends the current special symbol variation process. In the special view special power control process (FIG. 18) after this, the process moves to the jackpot game end process in step S302, and the jackpot game end process is performed.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot game end processing (step S350 in FIG. 18). In FIG. 29, the main CPU 110a loads the stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area in step S311-2 and the game information set in the game state buffer in step S311-4 (S350-1).

  After execution of step S350-1, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game flag setting processing (S350-2). In the high probability game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a determines the necessity of the setting of the high probability game flag at the end of the special game, based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-04, 06 to 08", the high probability game flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, and the other "05" is set. In the case of “09”, the high probability game flag is not set in the high probability game flag storage area.

  After execution of step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game number setting processing (S350-3). In the high probability gaming state setting process, the main CPU 110a stores the remaining fluctuation number (X) in the number of times played (X) storage area at the end of the special game based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1. Decide. In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01 to 04, 06 to 08", 10000 times are set in the number of times played (X) storage area, and the other "05," In the case of “09”, 0 times are set in the game count (X) storage area.

  After execution of step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving game flag setting processing (S350-4). In the time saving game flag setting process, the main CPU 110a determines the necessity of setting the time saving game flag at the end of the special game based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1. In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01" to "09", the time saving game flag is set in the time saving game flag storage area.

  After execution of step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs time-saving setting processing (S350-5). In the time saving setting process, the main CPU 110a determines the remaining fluctuation count (J) stored in the game count (J) storage area at the end of the special game based on the stop symbol data and the game information loaded in step S350-1. Do. In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol data loaded in step S350-1 is "01-04, 06 to 08", the number of times played (J) is set 100 times in the storage area, and the load is made in step S350-1. If the stopped symbol data is "05, 09", the number of times played (J) is set 100 times in the storage area.

  After execution of step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines the current gaming state based on the presence / absence of flags set in the high probability gaming flag storage area and the short time gaming flag storage area, and designates the gaming state corresponding to the current gaming state. A command is generated, and this gaming state designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (S350-6).

  After execution of step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 to the special view special power process data (S350-7), and ends the jackpot game end process. In the special figure special power control process (FIG. 18) after this, the process shifts to the special symbol storage determination process in step S302, and the special symbol storage determination process is performed.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the details of the general-purpose general power control process (step S400 in FIG. 14). In FIG. 30, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the data for processing for generalization common processing (S401). In the following step S402, the main CPU 110a refers to the branch address from the loaded special view special power process data, and shifts the processing to the normal symbol storage determination process if the general view general power process data = 0, and the general view general processing If data = 1, the processing is shifted to the normal symbol variation processing, if the general drawing general processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the normal symbol stopping processing, and if the general drawing general processing data = 3, to the auxiliary game processing Transfer the process.

  The outline of the normal symbol storage determination processing, the normal symbol variation processing, the normal symbol stop processing, and the auxiliary game processing is as follows. In the normal symbol storage determination processing (processing for general drawing general processing data = 0), the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of normal symbol holdings (G) in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area is 1 or more. judge. If the number of normal symbols held (G) is 0, the current normal symbol storage determination process is ended. If the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is 1 or more, the number of normal symbol holdings (G) in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area is decremented by one and updated, then the first number in the normal symbol holding storage area The data in the second to fourth storage units are shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the data in the first storage unit is written to the zeroth storage unit. At this time, the normal symbol random number value which has already been written in the 0 th storage portion of the normal symbol storage area is erased. Thereafter, main CPU 110a refers to the normal symbol lottery determination table of main ROM 110b, and based on the combination of presence / absence of the flag set in the short time game flag storage area and the normal symbol random number value in the 0th storage portion of the normal symbol storage area. Normal symbol lottery lottery results (perhaps or loses) are determined, and the normal symbol fluctuation time (29 seconds for non-time-saving gaming state, 0.2 seconds for time-saving gaming state) according to this lottery result decide.

  FIG. 21 (b) is a view showing a normal symbol lottery determination table. The normal symbol lottery determination table is stored in the main ROM 110 b of the main control board 110. In the normal symbol lottery determination table, when each pair of an ordinary symbol random number value and a lottery result (“hit” or “losing”) of an ordinary symbol lottery refers to a non-time-short game state and a short-time game state It is stored separately for reference. After the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is determined, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation time to the normal symbol time counter and starts the variation of the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22. Set "1".

  In the normal symbol variation processing (processing when the general drawing general processing data = 1), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (the normal symbol time counter has become 0), and the normal symbol variation If it is determined that the time has not passed, the current symbol variation process is ended. When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped and displayed with the symbol according to the normal symbol lottery result, and the predetermined normal symbol stop time is set to the normal symbol time counter. Set “2” to the figure general processing data.

  In the normal symbol stop processing (processing when the general drawing general processing data = 2), the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal symbol stop time has elapsed (the normal symbol time counter has become 0), and the normal symbol stop If it is determined that the time has not passed, the current normal symbol stop processing is ended. When it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is a hit symbol. When the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is not the symbol of the hit, “0” is set to the common pattern general processing data, and when the stop symbol of the normal symbol display device 22 is the symbol of the hit, Set "3" to the common map common power processing data.

  In the auxiliary game process (the process when the common view general process data = 3), the main CPU 110a is the open time of the second starting port 15 (0.2 seconds in the non-time game state, if the time game state The second start port 15 is opened over the open time, and then the second start port 15 is closed, and "0" is set in the generalization process data. .

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control board 120 of the gaming machine 1. The main process is started when a system reset is generated from the power supply substrate 170 to the sub CPU 120a of the effect control substrate 120 by a start operation (normal start operation, RAM clear start operation, or menu start operation).

  In FIG. 31, the sub CPU 120a performs an initialization process (S1000). In the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a performs a process of muting a sound, a process of restoring a character, a process of displaying a color bar as a game standby image, and the like.

  The sub CPU 120a waits for the elapse of a predetermined standby period while keeping the display image of the image display device 31 as the game standby image, when the operation that triggered the initialization process is the normal activation operation or the RAM clear activation operation. The display image of the image display device 31 is changed to an image waiting for a customer (an image having the left symbol 36L in the stopped state, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R). This waiting period is at least a time (for example, 8 seconds) longer than the time required from the power-on of the main control board 110 to the end of the initialization process (S10 in FIG. 10).

  In addition, when the operation that triggered the initialization processing is a menu activation operation, the sub CPU 12a switches the display image of the image display device 31 from the game standby image to the menu image, and the effect button 35, cross key 39, In accordance with the operation of the central key 39E, processing relating to store setting, RTC setting, eco mode setting, or debugging setting is performed. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

  When the display image of the image display device 31 becomes an image waiting for a customer after the elapse of the standby period in the initialization process, the player can play a game. After the end of the initialization process, the sub CPU 120a repeats the process (S1100) of updating the effect random number value and the like. Further, in addition to the update process of the random number value, the sub CPU 120a executes the timer interrupt process each time the reset clock pulse signal is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit. Details of this timer interrupt process will be described later.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing details of the initialization process (step S1000 in FIG. 31). In FIG. 32, the sub CPU 120a permits access to the sub RAM 120c (S1001). Next, the sub CPU 120a performs mute control processing (S1002). In the mute control process, the sub CPU 120 a transmits a mute designation command for muting the output sound of the audio output device 32 to the image control board 150. When the image control board 150 receives the mute designation command, the gain of the sound signal in the image control board 150 is set to zero.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a character article return designation command to the lamp control board 140 (S1003). When the lamp control board 140 receives the character return specification command, the lamp control board 140 returns the frame effect driving device (frame gimmick) 33a and the board effect driving devices 33b and 33c (board surface gimmick) to their initial positions.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a background music designation command for outputting background music during activation to the image control board 150 (S1004). When the image control board 150 receives the background music designation command, the gain of the sound signal in the image control board 150 is changed from 0 to the value of the set volume during activation, and the audio output device 32 outputs the background music during activation of the set volume. . The background music during startup is BGM (Back Ground Music) that is played during startup of the gaming machine 1 (during a period from power on to when it becomes possible to play a game).

  Next, the sub CPU 120a transmits a display designation command for displaying the game standby image (color bar image) to the image control board 150 (S1005). When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display the game standby image. FIG. 33 shows a game standby image. As shown in FIG. 33, the game standby image is an array of rectangular images of colors of different densities.

  In FIG. 32, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the effect button 35 is pressed based on the input signal of the effect button detection switch 35a (S1006). If the menu activation operation is performed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the other activation operation is performed, the determination result of this step is "No". When the effect button 35 is not pressed (S1006: No), the sub CPU 120a performs game standby control processing (S1007). When the effect button 35 is pressed (S1006: Yes), the sub CPU 120a performs menu image display control processing (S1008).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the details of the game standby control process (step S1007 of FIG. 32). In the game standby control process, the sub CPU 120a executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 34 every two milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse in the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120.

  In FIG. 34, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not a predetermined standby period has elapsed from the start of the game standby control process (S1071). When the standby period has elapsed (S1071: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1071-1. If the standby period has not elapsed (S1071: No), the process proceeds to step S1072.

  The sub CPU 120a checks whether the image display restriction flag is set in the image display restriction flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1072). Here, the image display restriction flag is a flag indicating that the display of the image being displayed is restricted. The image display restriction flag is set when the deletion of the image being displayed is determined in the command execution mode determination process triggered by the reception of the predetermined command (S1078-4 in FIG. 50, S1093-11 in FIG. 65), When the restoration of the image being erased is determined in the command execution mode determination process triggered by the reception of another predetermined command of (step S1078-8 in FIG. 50, and 1093-25 in FIG. 66). Details of the command execution mode determination process will be described later.

  When the image display restriction flag is not set (S1072: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1073. If the image display restriction flag is set (S1072: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1075.

  In step S1073, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the game standby flag is set in the game standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The game standby flag is a flag indicating that the game standby image has been displayed. When the game standby flag is not set (S1073: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1074. If the game standby flag is set (S1073: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1075.

  In step S1074, the sub CPU 120a sets a game standby flag in the game standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and after setting the flag, the process proceeds to step S1075.

  In step S1075, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1075: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1076. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1075: No), the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In step S1076, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special command (a command described as "special command" in FIG. 9). If the command in the reception buffer is a special command (S1076: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1077 and performs special command analysis processing during game standby. The game standby special command analysis process is a process of analyzing a special command in the reception buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. If the command in the reception buffer is not a special command (i.e., if it is a game command) (S1076: No), the process proceeds to step S1078 to perform game standby game command analysis processing. During the game standby, the game command analysis process is a process of analyzing the game command in the reception buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. The details of the special command analysis process during game standby and the game command analysis process during game standby will be described later.

  After execution of step S1077 or step S1078, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing (S1079). In the data output process, when there is a command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120 c, the sub CPU 120 a transmits the command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. After execution of step S1079, the sub CPU 120a returns to step S1071 and repeats the subsequent processing.

  In step S1071-1, the sub CPU 120a performs customer waiting state transition processing. In this process, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display an image (waiting image with left symbol 36L, middle symbol 36C, and right symbol 36R in a wait state), and the background during activation in the voice output device 32 Stop the music output. After this, the game of the gaming machine 1 becomes possible.

  FIGS. 35 and 36 are flow charts showing the details of the special command analysis process (step S1077 in FIG. 34) during the game standby. In FIG. 35, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a power on designation command (S1077-1). If the command in the reception buffer is the power on designation command (S1077-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1077-2. If the command in the reception buffer is not the power on designation command (S1077-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1077-3.

  In step S1077-2, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the character of "power on" on the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the special command in the current game standby is set. End analysis processing. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1079 in FIG. 34) after the special command analysis process during the current game standby. As shown in FIG. 37, when the display control command is received, the image control board 150 displays the characters “power on” in the upper right corner of the game standby image.

  In step S1077-3, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the RAM clear designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the RAM clear designation command (S1077-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1077-4. If the command in the reception buffer is not the RAM clear designation command (S1077-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1077-5.

  In step S1077-4, the sub CPU 120a stores the initial value (the gaming state information of the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state) of the gaming state information in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Thereafter, the special command analysis process during the current game is ended.

  In step S1077-5, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a power supply recovery designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a power supply recovery designation command (S1077-5: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1077-6. If the command in the reception buffer is not the power supply recovery designation command (S1077-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1077-8.

  In step S1077-6, the sub CPU 120a performs gaming state setting processing. In this gaming state setting process, when the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 1 designation command, the sub CPU 120a stores the gaming state information of the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state into the gaming state memory of the sub RAM 120c. Store in the area. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 2 designation command, the gaming state information of the low probability gaming state and the short time gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 3 designation command, the gaming state information of the high probability gaming state and the non-time-short gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the command received from the main control board 110 is the power recovery 4 designation command, the gaming state information of the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, a display designation command for displaying the character of "power restoration" on the display image of the image display device 31 (S1077-7), and after setting the command, the current game standby is in progress. End special command analysis processing. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1079 in FIG. 34) after the special command analysis process during the current game standby. As shown in FIG. 38, when the display control command is received, the image control board 150 displays the characters “power recovery” in the upper right corner of the game standby image.

  In step S1077-8, the sub CPU 120a performs command execution mode determination processing. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1077-8. In this table, data indicating each type of special command, data indicating whether it is necessary to execute the command itself (“o” or “x”), data indicating whether it is necessary to delete the game standby image after receiving the command ( "Erasing" or "No erasure", data indicating whether or not the game standby image needs to be restored after receiving a command ("Return" or "No return"), corresponding to the game standby image and command after receiving the command Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when displaying together with the image ("upper right corner" or "center"), data indicating whether it is necessary to stop background music after receiving the command ("with stop" or There are stored sets of “no stop”) and data (“return” or “no return”) indicating whether or not background music needs to be restored after receiving a command. When the sub CPU 120a receives a special command during display of the game standby image, it determines an execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 39, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and displays the image display device to the image control board 150. The contents of one or both of the display image 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 are changed.

  More specifically, in the table "Disc full error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", and the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "no deletion", The data indicating the necessity of image restoration is "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "upper right corner", the data showing the necessity of stopping background music is "No stop", background music The data indicating whether or not it is necessary to return is “no return”. In the record "Disc full tank error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "no erasure", the data indicating the necessity of image restoration "No return", data indicating the display position of the command and the corresponding image is "-" (there is no storage of data because the game standby image and the image corresponding to the command are not displayed together (other "-" The same applies to (a)), the data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "No stop", and the data indicating the necessity of returning the background music is "No Return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 40, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the counter-full-tan error command, the display of the game standby image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the counter-full-tank error command corresponds to the upper right corner of the screen Display a message image. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is maintained, and the message voice corresponding to the error-full error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the countersink error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the countersink error command and the message voice corresponding to the countersink error command. Stop the output of.

  Here, the situation where reception of a command other than the power-on designation command in the effect control board 120 precedes the reception of the power-on designation command is that an error has occurred at the time of power on of the main control board 110, or This may occur, for example, when the process proceeds to the next step without executing step S10-6 of the initialization process due to a malfunction or the like during execution of the initialization process (FIG. 11) of the main control board 110. Also, in such a situation, instead of the main control board 110, a debugging dedicated board or a factory shipping board is connected to the effect control board 120, and a command is transmitted from the debugging dedicated board or the factory shipping board to the production control board 120 It can also occur if it is

  In the "Counter Case Error Command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "deletion", and the necessity of restoration of the image is The data indicating "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping background music is "No stopping", the data showing necessity of background music restoration Is "no return". In the "Counter Case Error Resolution Command" record, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "No deletion", and the data indicating the necessity of image restoration Is "with return", the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is "without stop", the data showing that it is necessary to restore the background music is " There is no return.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 41, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the counter case error command, the game standby image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game standby image invisible and the counter case error command at the center of the screen And display the corresponding message image. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the counter case error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the counter case error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the counter case error command, and causes the game standby image to be displayed again. In this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the counter case error command is stopped.

  In the "Counting switch disconnection error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "No erasure", the necessity of restoring the image The data indicating "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "center", the data showing the necessity of stopping the background music "Stop", indicates the necessity of restoring the background music The data is "no return". In the "counting switch disconnection error cancellation command" record, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the necessity of image restoration is indicated. The data is "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping the background music is "No stopping", the data showing the necessity of restoration of the background music is It has become "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 42, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the counting switch disconnection error command, the display of the game standby image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message corresponding to the counting switch disconnection error command is displayed at the center of the screen. Display the image. Also, in this case, the output of background music during start-up in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and a message sound corresponding to the count switch disconnection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the counting switch disconnection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the counting switch disconnection error command, and the message corresponding to the counting switch disconnection error command Stop audio output.

  In the "No sphere error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the necessity of image restoration is Data indicating "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating necessity of stopping background music is "Stop", data indicating necessity of background music restoration Is "no return". In the record of "No ball error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", the data indicating the necessity of image restoration "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stopping", data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is " There is no return.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the ballless error command, the display of the game standby image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the message image corresponding to the ballless error command is restricted. Do. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and the output of the message sound corresponding to the no-ball error command is restricted. That is, when the ball-less error command or the ball-less error cancellation command is received while the game standby image is being displayed, the command is ignored for image display and sound output.

  In the table of “Payout Excess Error Command” records in this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is “No deletion”, and the necessity of image restoration is indicated. Data indicating "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "center", data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "Stop", data indicating the necessity of restoring background music Is "no return". In the record of “Discharge excess error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, the data indicating the necessity of restoration of the image "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stopping", data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is " It is "with return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 44, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a payout excess error command, the display of the game standby image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to the payout excess error command is displayed in the center of the screen. Display. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is stopped, and a message voice corresponding to the overdelivery command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the overdelivery error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the overdelivery error command. Further, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the overdelivery command is stopped, and the output of the background music during activation is resumed.

  In the table of “Payout command error command” records in this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is “no deletion”, and the necessity of image restoration is Data indicating "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "center", data indicating whether it is necessary to stop background music is "No stop", data indicating whether it is necessary to restore background music Is "no return". In the record of “Discharge command error elimination command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “no erasure”, the data indicating the necessity of restoring the image "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stopping", data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is " There is no return.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 45, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a payout command error command, the display of the game standby image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to the payout command error command is displayed in the center of the screen. Display. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is maintained, and a message voice corresponding to the payout command error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is a payout command error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the payout command error command, and outputs the message voice corresponding to the payout command error command. Stop.

  In the "door open error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "no deletion", and the necessity of image restoration is indicated. Data indicating "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "upper right corner", data indicating whether it is necessary to stop background music is "No stop", it is necessary to reset background music The data is "no return". In the record of "door open error cancellation command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", the data indicating the necessity of image restoration "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stopping", data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is " There is no return.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 46, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a door open error command, the display of the game standby image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to the door open error command in the upper right corner of the screen Is displayed. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the door open error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door open error command and outputs the message sound corresponding to the door open error command. Stop.

  In the "switch not connected error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "、", the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "erased", and the image restoration necessity is not necessary. The data indicating "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping the background music "Stop", indicates the necessity of restoring the background music The data is "no return". In the "switch not connected error elimination command" record, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the necessity of image restoration is indicated. The data is "with return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stop", the data showing the necessity of restoring the background music is It is "with return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the switch non-connection error command, the game standby image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game standby image invisible and the switch non-connected at the center of the screen Display the message image corresponding to the error command. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the switch non-connection error command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the switch non-connection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the switch non-connection error command, and causes the game standby image to be displayed again. Also, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the switch non-connection error command is stopped, and the output of background music during activation is resumed.

  In the record of “Magnet detection error command” of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “deletion”, and the necessity of restoration of the image is The data indicating "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping background music is "No stopping", the data showing necessity of background music restoration Is "no return". In the record of “Magnet detection error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, the data indicating the necessity of restoration of the image "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stopping", data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is " There is no return.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a magnet detection error command, the game standby image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game standby image invisible and the magnet detection error command at the center of the screen And display the corresponding message image. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is a magnet detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command, and outputs the message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command. Stop. In this case, the display of the image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and the output of the sound may be continued until the gaming machine 1 is restarted.

  Here, the data structure of the table shown in FIG. 39 is merely an example, and a table having a data structure different from this may be adopted. For example, in FIG. 39, only the no-ball error command and the no-ball error cancellation command have data in which the data indicating the necessity of command execution is “x”. However, also for the door open error command, if the data indicating the necessity of the command execution is "X" and the door open error command is received while the game standby image is displayed, a message image corresponding to the door open error command It is also possible to restrict the display of the message and the output of the message voice, and to ignore the door open error command for the display of the image and the voice output. In addition, regarding magnet detection error command and vibration detection error command which are unauthorized generation commands, data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "stopped", and the illegal generation command (magnet detection error is displayed while the game standby image is displayed When the command or the vibration detection error command is received, the game standby image is erased to set the background to a specific color (for example, red) and the output of the background music during activation is stopped, and the message image corresponding to the fraud generation command May be displayed and the message voice may be output, and the display of the message image and the output of the message voice may be maintained until the gaming machine 1 is restarted.

  In step S1077-9 in FIG. 35, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination process (the data of the command execution necessity is not It is determined whether or not "o". If the sub CPU 120 a determines “execute” whether or not the command in the reception buffer is to be executed (S 1077-9: Yes), the sub CPU 120 a proceeds to step S 1077-10. When it is "do not execute" (S1077-9: No), the special command analysis process during the current game standby is ended.

  In step S1077-10, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination processing. If it is determined that the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" (S1077-10: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1077-11. If “no deletion” (S1077-10: No), the process proceeds to step S1077-13.

  In step S1077-11, the sub CPU 120a sets an image display restriction flag in the image display restriction flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Next, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer (S1077-12), and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1077-16. The erase designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1079 in FIG. 34) after the special game analysis process during the current game standby. When the image control board 150 receives the erase designation command, the image control board 150 erases the game standby image of the image display device 31. Here, while the image display restriction flag is set, the determination result in step S1072 (FIG. 34) of the game standby control process (S1007 in FIG. 32) is "Yes", and steps S1073 to S1074 are skipped. , Deletion of the game standby image is maintained.

  Here, in step S1077-12, in place of the delete designation command for deleting the image, the display mode of the game standby image is changed so as not to prevent visual recognition of the message image corresponding to the receive command (specifically, To change the display mode, such as reducing the size of the game standby image, moving the display position of the game standby image to a corner, increasing the transparency of the game standby image, changing the display color of the game standby image, etc. A display mode change specification command may be set. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of changing the content of image display of the image display device 31 in the modification in which the display mode change finger command is set in step S1077-12. As shown in the example of FIG. 49, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception is the magnet detection error command, the size of the game standby image is reduced and moved to the lower left corner, etc. Make the display area of the image corresponding to the command empty.

  In step S1077-13 in FIG. 36, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of the image restoration is "with restoration" based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination processing. If it is determined that the necessity of the image return is “return” (S1077-13: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1077-14. If “no return” (S1077-13: No), the process proceeds to step S1077-16.

  In step S1077-14, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the game standby image in the transmission buffer. Next, the sub CPU 120a clears the image display restriction flag in the image display restriction flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1077-15), and after clearing the flag, the process proceeds to step S1077-16. The display designation command set in the transmission buffer in step S1077-14 is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1079 in FIG. 34) after the special game analysis process during the game standby time. When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 redisplays the game standby image which was being erased.

  In step S1077-16, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determined content of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the necessity of the background music stop is "with stop". If the sub-CPU 120a determines that the background music needs to be stopped is “stopped” (S1077-16: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1077-17. When it is "no stop" (S1077-16: No), it progresses to step S1077-18.

  In step S1077-17, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1077-20. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1079 in FIG. 34) after the special command analysis process during the current game standby. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

  In step S1077-18, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the necessity of the background music recovery is "with recovery". If the sub CPU 120a determines that the background music needs to be restored is "return" (S1077-18: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1077-19. If “no return” (S1077-18: No), the process proceeds to step S1077-20.

  In step S1077-19, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music designation command for outputting background music in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1077-20. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1079 in FIG. 34) after the special command analysis process during the current game standby. When the image control board 150 receives the background music designation command, the image control board 150 resumes the output of the starting background music which has been stopped.

  In step S1077-20, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designating command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the command in the reception buffer in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the special command in the current game standby is set. End analysis processing. Specifically, when the command in the reception buffer is an error command, the command to be set in the transmission buffer is a display of a message image corresponding to the error command (for example, if the It is assumed that the display of the characters "full size error" and the output of the message voice (for example, the output of a warning sound "if full size error command is" full size error "if there is a full size error command") are specified. If the command in the reception buffer is an error resolution command, the command to be set in the transmission buffer designates deletion of the message image being displayed and stop of the message voice being output. The command set in the transmission buffer in step S1077-20 is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1079 in FIG. 34) after the special game analysis process during the current game standby. When receiving the command, the image control board 150 changes the display image of the image display device 31 according to the command, and changes the output sound of the audio output device 32.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the details of the game command analysis process (step S1078 in FIG. 34) during the game standby. In FIG. 50, the sub CPU 120a performs command execution mode determination processing (S1078-1). In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1078-1. As shown in FIG. 51, in this table, data indicating each type of game command, data indicating whether it is necessary to execute the command itself (“o” or “x”), deletion of the game standby image after receiving the command Data indicating whether it is necessary or not (“erased” or “no erasure”), data indicating whether or not the game standby image needs to be restored after receiving the command (“reverted” or “not returned”), the game after receiving the command Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command when displaying both the standby image and the image corresponding to the command (“upper right corner” or “center”), indicating whether or not to stop background music after receiving the command A set of data ("with stop" or "no stop") and data ("with return" or "no return") indicating whether or not background music needs to be restored after receiving a command is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a game command during display of the game standby image, it determines an execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 51, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and displays the image display device on the image control board 150. The contents of one or both of the display image 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 are changed.

  More specifically, in the "variation start command" record of this table, the data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "O", the data indicating whether or not image deletion is necessary is "erased", and the image Data indicating the necessity of restoration is "No return", data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data showing necessity of stopping background music is "Stop", background music is restored The data indicating whether it is necessary or not is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the fluctuation start command, the game standby image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game standby image invisible and the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation start command Display the image. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

  In the table of “start winning design designation command” in this table, data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “x”, data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, and the necessity of restoration of the image is The data indicating "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping background music is "No stopping", the data showing necessity of background music restoration Is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 53, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the start winning designation command, the display of the game standby image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning designation command is restricted. Do. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during start-up in the voice output device 32 is maintained, and the output of the effect sound corresponding to the start winning combination designation command is restricted. That is, when the start winning combination designation command is received while the game standby image is displayed, the start winning combination designation command is ignored for the display of the image and the output of the sound.

  In the "special game start command (opening specification command)" record of this table, the data indicating whether the command itself needs to be executed is "O", the data indicating whether the image needs to be erased is "erased", and the image Data indicating the necessity of restoration is "No return", data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data showing necessity of stopping background music is "Stop", background music is restored The data indicating whether it is necessary or not is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the special game start command (opening designation command), the game standby image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game standby image invisible and the special game A message image corresponding to the start command (opening specification command) is displayed. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the special game start command (opening specification command) is output.

  Here, the data structure of the table shown in FIG. 51 is merely an example, and a table having a data structure different from this may be adopted. For example, in the table of FIG. 51, only the change start command and the opening designation command are those for which data indicating “necessity of execution of the command” is “o”. However, with regard to the round start command, data indicating the necessity of execution of the command is set as "o", and when the round start command is received during display of the game standby image, the game standby image is erased and the corresponding round An effect image of a round game may be displayed, the output of background music being activated may be stopped, and at the same time an effect sound of the round game of the corresponding round may be output.

  The processing contents of each processing of step S1078-2 to step S1078-13 in FIG. 50 are the processing contents of each processing of step S1077-9 to step S1077-20 in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 (special command analysis processing during game standby) Is the same as

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing details of the menu image display control process (step S1008 in FIG. 32). In the menu image display control process, the sub CPU 120a executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 55 every two milliseconds, which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse in the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120.

  In FIG. 55, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the power of the gaming machine 1 has been cut off (S1081). If the sub CPU 120a determines that a power failure has occurred (S1081: Yes), it proceeds to step S1081-1. If it is determined that the power supply has not been interrupted (S1081: No), the process proceeds to step S1082.

  The sub CPU 120a confirms whether the image display restriction flag is set in the image display restriction flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1082). When the image display restriction flag is not set (S1082: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1083. If the image display restriction flag is set (S1082: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1091.

  In step S1083, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the menu flag is set in the menu flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The menu flag is a flag indicating that a menu image has been displayed. When the menu flag is not set (S1083: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1084. If the menu flag is set (S1083: YES), the process proceeds to step S1088.

  In step S1084, the sub CPU 120a sets the menu flag in the menu flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Next, the sub CPU 120a sets "00", which is data indicating the main menu, to the screen counter of the sub RAM 120c (S1085). The screen counter is identification information of various images. The relationship between the screen counter and each image is as shown in FIG. 56 (a). As shown in FIG. 56A, the screen counter = 00 corresponds to the main menu. Screen counter = 01 corresponds to store settings. The screen counter = 02 corresponds to the RTC setting. The screen counter = 03 corresponds to the eco mode. The screen counter = 04 corresponds to the debug mode.

  FIG. 57 is a display example of the main menu image. As shown in FIG. 57, the main menu image is composed of menu items of store setting, RTC setting, eco mode, debug mode, an image imitating the cross key 39, and an image imitating the effect button 35.

  While the main menu image is being displayed, an operation to specify a transition destination is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. First, by operating the upper cursor key 39A and the lower cursor key 39B of the cross key 39, desired ones of the menu items are selected. After the desired menu item is selected, the effect button 35 is pressed to confirm the destination.

  FIG. 58 is a display example of a shop setting image. As shown in FIG. 58, the store setting image is made up of volume, character, normal music setting fields, and an image imitating the cross key 39.

  While the store setting image is displayed, an operation to change the store setting value of the volume, the store setting value of the main character, or the store setting value of the normal music is possible. Here, normal time music is music to be reproduced before reaching reach (FIG. 5 (a)) or development effect (FIG. 5 (b)) during the movement of the symbols 36L, 36C, 36R. The procedure of operation is as follows.

  When it is desired to change the store setting value of the volume, the volume setting column is selected by operating the upper cursor key 39A and the lower cursor key 39B of the cross key 39, and the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39 are selected. By the operation of, the value in the setting column is changed within the range of the volume 0-11.

  To change the store setting value of the main character, the character setting field is selected by operating the up cursor key 39A and the down cursor key 39B of the cross key 39, and the left cursor key 39C of the cross key 39 and the right cursor key By the operation of 39D, the values in the setting fields are changed within the range of characters A, B, C, D, E, and F.

  If you want to change the store settings for normal music, use the up cursor key 39A and the lower cursor key 39B on the cross key 39 to select the normal music setting field and use the left cursor key 39C on the cross key 39 By the operation of the right cursor key 39D, the value in the setting field is changed within the range of music 1 to 60.

  When it is desired to return to the main menu, the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 59 is a display example of an RTC setting image. As shown in FIG. 59, the RTC setting image indicates the current time (13 in the example of FIG. 59), the minute (25 in the example of FIG. 59), and the second (20 in the example of FIG. 59) indicated by the output signal of the RTC 120d. , And an image imitating the cross key 39.

  During display of this RTC setting image, an operation of adjusting the time of the RTC 120 d is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. First, by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, desired ones of the hours, minutes, and seconds are selected. When it is desired to advance the selected time, minute or second, the upper cursor key 39A is pressed. If it is desired to delay the selected time, minute, or second, the down cursor key 39B is pressed.

  When it is desired to return to the main menu, the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 60 is a display example of the eco mode setting image. As shown in FIG. 60, in the eco mode setting image, characters of “set to eco mode”, options “Yes” and “No”, an image imitating the cross key 39, and the effect button 35 It consists of the imitation image.

  While the eco mode setting image is being displayed, an operation to set the eco mode is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. First, by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, a desired one of "Yes" and "No" is selected. After selecting a desired item, the effect button 35 is pressed to confirm the selection.

  When it is desired to return to the main menu, the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 61 is a display example of a debug mode setting image. As shown in FIG. 61, in the debug mode setting image, the characters “Do you want to start debugging”, the options “Yes” and “No”, the image imitating the cross key 39, and the effect button 35 are simulated. The image consists of

  While this debug mode setting image is being displayed, an operation to specify the start of debugging is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. First, by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, a desired one of "Yes" and "No" is selected. After selecting a desired item, the effect button 35 is pressed to confirm the selection.

  When it is desired to return to the main menu, the center key 39E is pressed.

  In FIG. 55, after execution of step S1085, the sub CPU 120a sets “00”, which is data indicating store setting, in the selection counter of the sub RAM 120c (S1086). The selection counter is identification information of four menu items of the main menu. The relationship between the selection counter and each menu item is as shown in FIG. 56 (b). As shown in FIG. 56 (b), selection counter = 00 corresponds to a menu item of store setting. The selection counter = 01 corresponds to the menu item of the RTC setting. The selection counter = 02 corresponds to the menu item of the eco mode. The selection counter = 03 corresponds to the menu item of the debug mode.

  Next, based on the data set in the screen counter and the data set in the selection counter, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying a menu image in the transmission buffer (S1087). After setting, the process proceeds to step S1091. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095). When the display control command is received, the image control board 150 causes the image display device 31 to display a menu image.

  In step S1088, the sub CPU 120a determines whether any operation signal of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, and 39e of the center key 39E is input. If any of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and all of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E are pressed. If not, the determination result of this step is "No". If the sub CPU 120a determines that the operation signal is input (S1088: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1089. When it is determined that the operation signal is not input (S1088: No), the process proceeds to Step 1091.

  In step S1089, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the operation restriction flag is set in the operation restriction flag storage area of sub RAM 120c. The operation restriction flag is a flag indicating that the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is restricted. The operation restriction flag is set when the operation restriction of the effect button 35, the cross key 39 and the center key 39E is determined in the command execution mode determination process triggered by the reception of a predetermined command (S1093-14 in FIG. 65). When the release of the operation restriction is determined in the command execution mode determination process triggered by the reception of another predetermined command later, the process is cleared (S1093-27 in FIG. 67).

  If the operation restriction flag is not set (S1089: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090 and performs menu operation control processing. The menu operation control process changes the display image of the image display device 31 in accordance with the operation signals of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, 39e of the center key 39E, and the sub RAM 120c. It is a process of updating the setting value of. Details of this menu operation control process will be described later. If the operation restriction flag is set (S1089: Yes), the menu operation control process of step S1090 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1091.

  In step S1091, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 120c. If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1091: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1092. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1091: No), the process proceeds to step S1095.

  In step S1092, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special command (a command described as "special command" in FIG. 9). If the command in the reception buffer is a special command (S1092: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093 and performs special command analysis processing during menu image display control. The menu image display control special command analysis process is a process of analyzing a special command in the reception buffer, generating a command corresponding to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. If the command in the reception buffer is not a special command (i.e., if it is a game command) (S1092: No), the process proceeds to step S1094, and game command analysis processing during menu image display control is performed. The menu image display control game command analysis process is a process of analyzing the game command in the reception buffer, generating a command according to the analysis result, and setting the generated command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the special command analysis processing during menu image display control and the game command analysis processing during menu image display control will be described later.

  After execution of step S1093 or step S1094, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing (S1095). In the data output process, when there is a command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120 c, the sub CPU 120 a transmits the command to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. After execution of step S1095, the sub CPU 120a returns to step S1081 and repeats the subsequent processing.

  In step S1081-1, the sub CPU 120a performs a power-off termination process, and then performs an infinite loop to prepare for power-off. In the power-off termination process, data in the use area of the sub RAM 120c (for example, volume store setting information of the volume store setting information storage area, character store setting information of the character store setting information storage area, music store of the music store setting information storage area A series of processes are performed to restore the setting information, the eco mode setting information of the eco mode setting information storage area, and the like at the next power-on. Here, the manager of the store of the gaming machine 1 causes the menu image to be displayed by the menu activation operation, and after performing various settings of the store setting and the eco mode setting, the gaming machine 1 is ended once before the normal activation operation. Do a reboot.

  62 and 63 are flowcharts showing the details of the menu operation control process (step S1090 in FIG. 55). In FIG. 62, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the input signal that has triggered the menu operation control process this time is from the effect button detection switch 35a (S1090-1). If the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the cross key 39 or the center key 39E is pressed, the determination result of this step is "No".

  If the input signal is not from the effect button detection switch 35a (S1090-1: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090 and performs selection button determination processing. Details of this selection button determination process will be described later. If the input signal is from the effect button detection switch 35a (S1090-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-3.

  In step S1090-3, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a main menu image (screen counter = 00). If the display image is the main menu image (S1090-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-4. If it is not the main menu image (S1090-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1090-7.

  In step S1090-4, the sub CPU 120a updates the screen counter with the data of the migration destination. Specifically, if the selection counter is "00", the sub CPU 120a sets the screen counter to "01". If the selection counter is "01", the screen counter is set to "02". If the selection counter is "02", the screen counter is set to "03". If the selection counter is "03", the screen counter is set to "04".

  In step S1090-5, the sub CPU 120a performs transition preparation processing based on the screen counter after the update in step S1090-4. In this preparation process, if the screen counter after updating is 01 (the transfer destination is store setting), 00 which is data corresponding to "store setting" is set in the setting target counter in the sub RAM 120c. In addition, data corresponding to each store setting information of the volume store setting information storage area, the character store setting information storage area, and the volume store setting information storage area in the sub RAM 120c are set in the volume counter, character counter and music counter in the sub RAM 120c. Do.

  Here, the setting target counter is data for selecting one of the volume, the character, and the normal music as the setting target. The setting target counter = 00 corresponds to the volume. The setting target counter = 01 corresponds to the character. The setting target counter = 02 corresponds to normal music.

  The volume counter is data for selecting the store setting value of the volume within the range of 0-11. Volume counter = 00 corresponds to volume 0, volume counter = 01 corresponds to volume 1 ... volume counter = 11 corresponds to volume 11, respectively. The character counter is data for selecting the store setting value of the main character from among A, B, C, D, E, and F. A character counter = 00 corresponds to the character A, a character counter = 01 corresponds to the character B, and a character counter = 05 corresponds to the character F, respectively. The music counter is data for selecting a store setting value of normal music within a range of 1 to 60. The music counter = 00 corresponds to the music 1, the music counter = 01 corresponds to the music 2,... The music counter = 59 corresponds to the music 60, respectively.

  Further, in this preparation process, when the screen counter after updating is 02 (the migration destination is the RTC setting), 00 which is data corresponding to “time” is set in the operation target counter. Further, date and time information is acquired from the RTC 120 d, and the time, minute, and second indicated by the date and time information are set in the time counter, minute counter, and second counter of the sub RAM 120 c.

  Here, the operation target counter is data for selecting one of the hours, minutes, and seconds as the operation target. The operation target counter = 00 corresponds to time. The operation target counter = 01 corresponds to a minute. The operation target counter = 02 corresponds to a second. The time counter is data for selecting a time within the range of 00-23. The time counter = 00 corresponds to 0 o'clock, the time counter = 01 corresponds to 1 o'clock, ... time counter = 23 corresponds to 23 o'clock. The minute counter is data for selecting a minute within the range of 00-59. The minute counter = 00 corresponds to 0 minute, the minute counter = 01 to 1 minute, ... the minute counter = 59 to 59 minutes. The second counter is data for selecting a second within the range of 00-59. The second counter = 00 corresponds to 0 second, the second counter = 01 to 1 second, ... second counter = 59 seconds to 59 seconds.

  Further, in this preparation process, if the screen counter after updating is 03 (transition destination is eco mode setting) or 04 (transition destination is debugging mode setting), 00 is set to the YN counter of the sub RAM 120c. The YN counter is data for selecting one of two options “Yes” and “No”. YN counter = 00 corresponds to "Yes". YN counter = 01 corresponds to "No".

  After execution of step S1090-5, the sub CPU 120a is based on the screen counter, the selection counter, the setting object counter, the volume counter, the character counter, the music counter, the operation object counter, the time counter, the minute counter, the minute counter, the second counter, and the YN counter. Then, the image of the transition destination is determined, and a display designation command for displaying this image is set in the transmission buffer (S1090-6), and after setting of the command, the current menu operation control process is ended. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the current menu operation control process. When the image control board 150 receives the display designation command, the image of the transfer destination (store setting (FIG. 58), RTC setting (FIG. 59), eco mode setting (FIG. 60), or debug mode setting (FIG. 60) is displayed on the image display device 31. Fig. 61) is displayed.

  In step S1090-7 in FIG. 63, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a store setting image (screen counter = 01). If the display image is a shop setting image (S1090-7: Yes), the sub CPU 120a ends the current menu operation control process. If it is not the store setting image (S1090-7: No), the process proceeds to step S1090-8.

  In step S1090-8, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is an RTC setting image (screen counter = 02). If the display image is an RTC setting image (S1090-8: Yes), the sub CPU 120a ends the current menu operation control process. If the image is not an RTC setting image (S1090-8: No), the process proceeds to step S1090-9.

  In step S1090-9, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is the eco mode setting image (screen counter = 03). If the display image is the eco mode setting image (S1090-9: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-10. If it is not the eco mode setting image (S1090: No), the process proceeds to step S1090-13.

  In step S1090-10, the sub CPU 120a refers to the YN counter of the sub RAM 120c, and determines whether or not YN counter = 00. If the presentation button 35 is pressed in the selection state of "Yes" in the eco mode setting image, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the presentation button 35 is pressed in the selection state of "No", this The determination result of the step is "No". If the YN counter = 00 (S1090-10: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-1.

  In step S1090-1, the sub CPU 120a performs eco mode setting processing. In the eco mode setting process, the sub CPU 120a stores eco mode setting information in the eco mode setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the eco mode setting information is stored in the eco mode setting information storage area, the sub CPU 120a restarts, and after the game is ready to be played, each device 31, 32 of the gaming machine 1 under the eco mode setting, It controls the operation of 33a, 33b, 33c, 34. If the YN counter is not 00 (S 1090-10: No), the process skips step S 1090-11 and proceeds to step S 1090-12.

  In step S1090-12, the sub CPU 120a clears the menu flag in the menu flag storage area, and ends the current menu operation control process after clearing the flag.

  If the menu flag is cleared, the process returns to step S1081 (FIG. 55) after the current menu operation control processing, and the determination result in step S1083 when S1081: No → S1082: No → S1083 is "No". The processing proceeds from step S1084 to step S1085 to step S1086 to step S1087, the display specification command of the main menu image is transmitted to the image control board 150, and the display image of the image display device 31 returns to the main menu image.

  In step S1090-13, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a debug mode setting image (screen counter = 04). If the display image is a debug mode setting image (S1090-13: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-14. When it is not the debug mode setting image (S1090-13: No), the menu operation control process of this time is ended.

  In step S1090-14, the sub CPU 120a refers to the YN counter of the sub RAM 120c and determines whether or not YN counter = 00. If the effect button 35 is pressed in the debug mode setting image “Yes” selection state, the determination result of this step is “Yes”, and if the effect button 35 is pressed in the “No” selection state, this step The judgment result of is "No". If the YN counter = 00 (S1090-14: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-15. In step S1090-15, the sub CPU 120a executes a debugging process. Here, the debugging process starts in a state where the inspection personal computer is connected to the external command interface of the effect control board 120. When the debugging process starts, the gaming machine 1 enters an external command priority mode in which commands from the outside are preferentially received. During execution of the debugging process, the sub CPU 120a causes the image display device 31 to display a processing state presentation image indicating the execution state of debugging in accordance with a command input from the inspection personal computer via the external command face. If the YN counter is not 00 (S 1090-4: No), the process skips step S 1090-15 and proceeds to step S 1090-16.

  In step S1090-16, the menu flag in the menu flag storage area is cleared, and after clearing the flag, the current menu operation control process is ended.

  When the menu flag is cleared, the process returns to the menu operation control process from the current selection button determination process, and after the menu operation control process is finished, the display image of the image display device 31 is main through the process of step S1087 (FIG. 55). Return to the menu image.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing details of the selection button determination process (step S1090-2 in FIG. 62). In FIG. 64, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the input signal that has triggered the menu operation control process is from the central key detection switch 39e (S1090-27). If the center key 39E is pressed, the determination result in this step is "Yes", and the cross key 39 (one of the upper cursor key 39A, lower cursor key 39B, left cursor key 39C, and right cursor key 39D) If it is pressed, the determination result of this step is "No".

  If the input signal is from the central key detection switch 39e (S1090-27: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-28. If the input signal is not from the central key detection switch 39e (S1090-27: No), the process proceeds to step S1090-29.

  In step S1090-28, the menu flag in the menu flag storage area is cleared, and after the flag is cleared, the current selection button determination processing is ended.

  When the menu flag is cleared, the process returns to the menu operation control process from the current selection button determination process, and after the menu operation control process is finished, the display image of the image display device 31 is main through the process of step S1087 (FIG. 55). Return to the menu image.

  In step S1090-29, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a main menu image (screen counter = 00). If the display image is the main menu image (S1090-29: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-30. If it is not the main menu image (S1090-29: No), the process proceeds to step S1090-31.

  In step S1090-30, sub CPU 120a updates the selection counter based on the type of cross key 39, and after updating the counter, proceeds to step S1090-39. Specifically, if the operation signal from the cross key detection switch 39a of the upper cursor key 39A is input, the selection counter is decremented by 1 and the operation signal from the cross key detection switch 39b of the lower cursor key 39B is updated. Is input, the selection counter is updated by +1.

  In step S1090-31, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a store setting image (screen counter = 01). If the display image is a store setting image (S1090-31: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-32. When it is not a store setting image (S1090: No), it progresses to Step S1090-33.

  In step S1090-32, the sub CPU 120a performs shop setting processing, and proceeds to step S1090-39 after execution of the shop setting processing. In the store setting process, when the sub CPU 120a updates the setting target counter, the volume counter, the character counter, or the music counter based on the type of the cross key 39 and updates the volume counter, the character counter, or the music counter On the basis of the updated counter, each setting information of the volume shop setting information storage area, the character shop setting information storage area, and the music shop setting information storage area in the sub RAM 120c is updated.

  More specifically, if the sub CPU 120a receives a signal from the cross key detection switch 39a of the upper cursor key 39A, the sub CPU 120a updates the setting target counter by one. If a signal from the cross key detection switch 39b of the lower cursor key 39B is input, the operation target counter is incremented by one and updated.

  If the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C is input, the volume counter, the character counter, and the music counter, which correspond to the setting target counter, are incremented by +1. If the signal from the cross key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is input, the volume counter, the character counter, and the music counter corresponding to the setting target counter are decremented by one.

  When the volume counter is updated, the volume store setting information in the volume store setting information storage area is updated according to the volume counter after the update. When the character counter is updated, the character shop setting information in the character shop setting information storage area is updated according to the updated character counter. When the music counter is updated, the music shop setting information in the music shop setting information storage area is updated according to the updated music counter.

  In step S1090-33, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is an RTC setting image (screen counter = 02). If the display image is an RTC setting image (S1090-33: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-34. If the image is not an RTC setting image (S1090-33: No), the process proceeds to step S1090-35.

  In step S1090-34, the sub CPU 120a performs an RTC setting process, and proceeds to step S1090-39 after executing the RTC setting process. In the RTC setting process, the sub CPU 120a updates the operation target counter, the time counter, the minute counter, or the second counter based on the type of the cross key 39, and updates the time counter, the minute counter, or the second counter. , Change the setting of the RTC 120 d based on the updated counter.

  More specifically, if the sub CPU 120a receives a signal from the cross key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C, the sub CPU 120a updates the operation target counter by one. If the signal from the cross key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is input, the operation target counter is incremented by +1.

  If the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39a of the upper cursor key 39A is input, the time counter, minute counter, and second counter corresponding to the operation target counter are incremented by 1 and updated, and the updated counter is updated. A correction signal that advances the time, minute, or second is output to the RTC 120 d.

  If the signal from the cross key detection switch 39b of the lower cursor key 39B is input, the time counter, minute counter, and second counter corresponding to the operation target counter are decremented by one and updated, and the counter after the update A correction signal that delays the time, minute, or second according to the output is output to the RTC 120 d.

  In step S1090-35, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is the eco mode setting image (screen counter = 03). If the display image is the eco mode setting image (S1090-35: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-36. If the display image is not the eco mode setting image (S1090-35: No), the process proceeds to step S1090-37.

  In step S1090-36, sub CPU 120a updates the YN counter based on the type of cross key 39, and after updating the counter, the process proceeds to step S1090-39. Specifically, if a signal from the arrow key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C is input, the YN counter is incremented by 1 and updated, and a signal from the arrow key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is input. If yes, the YN counter is decremented by one and updated.

  In step S1090-37, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a debug mode setting image (screen counter = 04). If the display image is the debug mode setting image (S1090-37: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1090-38. If the display image is not the debug mode setting image (S1090-37: No), the process proceeds to step S1090-39.

  In step S1090-38, sub CPU 120a updates the YN counter based on the type of cross key 39, and after updating the counter, the process proceeds to step S1090-39. Specifically, if a signal from the arrow key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C is input, the YN counter is incremented by 1 and updated, and a signal from the arrow key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is input. If yes, the YN counter is decremented by one and updated.

  In step S1090-39, the sub CPU 120a displays an image based on the screen counter, selection counter, setting object counter, volume counter, character counter, music counter, operation object counter, time counter, minute counter, second counter, and YN counter. The display image of the device 31 is determined, and a display designation command for displaying the image is set in the transmission buffer, and after the command is set, the current selection button determination process is ended. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55).

  FIGS. 65, 66 and 67 are flowcharts showing the details of the special command analysis process (step S1093 in FIG. 55) during menu image display control. In FIG. 65, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a power on designation command (S1093-1). If the command in the reception buffer is a power on designation command (S1093-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-2. If the command in the reception buffer is not the power on designation command (S1093-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1093-3.

  In step S1093-2, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the character of "power on" on the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the menu image display control of this time is in progress. End special command analysis processing. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the present menu image display control. As shown in FIG. 68, when the display control command is received, the image control board 150 displays the word "power on" in the upper right corner of the menu image.

  In step S1093-3, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the RAM clear designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the RAM clear designation command (S1093-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-4. If the command in the reception buffer is not the RAM clear designation command (S1093-3: No), the process proceeds to step S1093-5.

  In step S1093-4, the game state storage area of the sub RAM 120c stores the initial value of the game state information (the game state information of the low probability game state and the non-time-short game state). Thereafter, the special command analysis processing during the present menu image display control is ended.

  In step S1093-5, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a power supply recovery designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a power supply restoration designation command (S1093-5: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-6. If the command in the reception buffer is not the power supply recovery designation command (S1093-5: No), the process proceeds to step S1093-8.

  In step S1093-6, the sub CPU 120a performs gaming state setting processing. The processing content of this step S1093-6 is the same as the processing content of step S1077-6 in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the character of "power restoration" on the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer (S1093-7), and displays the current menu image after setting the command. Terminates special command analysis processing during control. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the present menu image display control. As shown in FIG. 69, when the display control command is received, the image control board 150 displays the characters “power recovery” in the upper right corner of the menu image.

  In step S1093-8, the sub CPU 120a performs command execution mode determination processing. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1093-8. As shown in FIG. 70, in this table, data indicating each type of special command, data indicating whether it is necessary to execute the command itself (“o” or “x”), menu image or setting image after receiving the command Data indicating whether it is necessary to delete the item (“with deletion” or “without deletion”), data indicating whether or not the menu image or setting image needs to be restored after receiving the command (“with return” or “without return”), command Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command in the case of displaying both the menu image or the setting image and the image corresponding to the command after the reception (“upper right corner” or “center”), the menu image or Data indicating whether it is necessary to restrict operations when displaying both the setting image and the image corresponding to the command (“restricted” or “non-restricted”), operations after receiving the command Data indicating whether it is necessary to release the restriction (“released” or “no release”), data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped after receiving the command (“stopped” or “no stop”), and command reception Each set of data (“with return” or “without return”) indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored later is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a special command during display of a menu image or setting image, the sub CPU 120a determines an execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 70, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and transmits an image to the image control board 150 The contents of one or both of the display image of the display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 are changed.

  More specifically, in the table "Disc full error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", and the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "no deletion", The data indicating the necessity of image restoration is "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "upper right corner", the data showing the necessity of operation restriction is "No restriction", the operation restriction is canceled The data indicating whether the background music is required is "-", the data indicating the necessity of stopping the background music is "no stopping", and the data indicating the necessity of restoring the background music is "no return". In the record "Disc full tank error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "no erasure", the data indicating the necessity of image restoration "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of operation restriction is "-", data indicating the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is "-", Data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stop", and data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before receiving is the flush full error command, the display of the menu image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to the flush full error command is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Display. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is maintained, and the message voice corresponding to the error-full error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the countersink error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the countersink error command and the message voice corresponding to the countersink error command. Stop the output of.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 72, power on specification during display of the shop setting image If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the counter-full-tan error command, the display of the store setting image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the counter-full-tank error command corresponds to the upper right corner of the screen Display a message image. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is maintained, and the message voice corresponding to the error-full error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the countersink error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the countersink error command and the message voice corresponding to the countersink error command. Stop the output of.

  In the "Counter Case Error Command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "deletion", and the necessity of restoration of the image is The data indicating "No return", the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data indicating the necessity of the operation restriction is "-", the data indicating the necessity of the cancellation of the operation restriction is "- The data indicating whether or not to stop the background music is “no stop”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored is “no return”. In the "Counter Case Error Resolution Command" record, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "No deletion", and the data indicating the necessity of image restoration Is "with return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of the operation restriction is "-", data indicating the necessity of the operation restriction release is "-", Data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stop", and data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before reception is the counter case error command, the menu image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the menu image invisible and a message corresponding to the counter case error command is displayed at the center of the screen Display the image. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the counter case error command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the counter case error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the counter case error command and displays the menu image again. In this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the counter case error command is stopped.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 74, power on specification during display of the shop setting image) When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the counter case error command, the store setting image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the store setting image invisible and the counter case error command at the center of the screen And display the corresponding message image. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the counter case error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the counter case error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the counter case error command, and displays the shop setting image again. In this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the counter case error command is stopped.

  In the "Counting switch disconnection error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "No erasure", the necessity of restoring the image The data indicating “No return”, the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “center”, the data showing necessity of operation restriction is “restricted”, the data shows necessity of operation restriction release "-", Data indicating whether or not to stop background music is "with", and data indicating whether or not background music needs to be restored is "no return". In the "counting switch disconnection error cancellation command" record, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the necessity of image restoration is indicated. The data is "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of operation restriction is "-", the data showing the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is "No release" The data indicating whether or not to stop the background music is “no stop”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored is “no return”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 75, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before reception is the counting switch disconnection error command, the display of the menu image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message corresponding to the counting switch disconnection error command is displayed in the menu image at the center of the screen. Display the image superimposed. Further, after this display, the operations of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E are restricted. Also, in this case, the output of background music during start-up in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and a message sound corresponding to the count switch disconnection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the counting switch disconnection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the counting switch disconnection error command, and the message corresponding to the counting switch disconnection error command Stop audio output.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 76, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 76, power on specification during display of the shop setting image) If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the counting switch disconnection error command, the display of the store setting image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the counting switch disconnection error command is stored in the store setting image at the center of the screen. And display the message image corresponding to. Further, after this display, the operations of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E are restricted. Also, in this case, the output of background music during start-up in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and a message sound corresponding to the count switch disconnection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the counting switch disconnection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the counting switch disconnection error command, and the message corresponding to the counting switch disconnection error command Stop audio output.

  In the "No sphere error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the necessity of image restoration is The data indicating "No return", the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data indicating the necessity of the operation restriction is "-", the data indicating the necessity of the cancellation of the operation restriction is "- The data indicating whether or not to stop background music is “with stop”, and the data indicating whether or not background music needs to be restored is “without return”. In the record of "No ball error elimination command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", the data indicating the necessity of image restoration "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of operation restriction is "-", data indicating the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is "-", Data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stop", and data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 77, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception is the no-ball error command, the display of the menu image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the message image corresponding to the no-ball error command is restricted. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and the output of the message sound corresponding to the no-ball error command is restricted. That is, when the command with no sphere or no error with no sphere is received while displaying the menu image, the command is ignored for the display of the image and the output of the sound.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 78, when the image control board 150 is displaying a store setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 78, power on specification during display of the store setting image If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the ballless error command, the display of the store setting image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the message image corresponding to the ballless error command is restricted. Do. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and the output of the message sound corresponding to the no-ball error command is restricted. That is, when the ball-less error command or the ball-less error cancellation command is received while the store setting image is being displayed, the command is ignored for image display and sound output.

  In the table of “Payout Excess Error Command” records in this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is “No deletion”, and the necessity of image restoration is indicated. The data indicating “No return”, the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “center”, the data indicating the necessity of operation restriction is “limited”, the data showing the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is “ The data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "with a stop", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored is "no return". In the record of “Discharge excess error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, the data indicating the necessity of restoration of the image "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of operation restriction is "-", data indicating the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction "canceled" The data indicating whether it is necessary to stop background music is "without stop", and the data showing whether it is necessary to restore background music is "with return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 79, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception is the overdelivery error command, the display of the menu image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to the overdelivery error command is displayed in the menu image at the center of the screen. Overlap and display. Further, after this display, the operations of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E are restricted. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is stopped, and a message voice corresponding to the overdelivery command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the overdelivery error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the overdelivery error command. In addition, after this deletion, the restriction on the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is released. Further, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the overdelivery command is stopped, and the output of the background music during activation is resumed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 80, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a payout excess error command, the display of the store setting image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the payout setting error command corresponds to the store setting image at the center of the screen. To display the message image. Further, after this display, the operations of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E are restricted. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is stopped, and a message voice corresponding to the overdelivery command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the overdelivery error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the overdelivery error command. In addition, after this deletion, the restriction on the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is released. Further, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the overdelivery command is stopped, and the output of the background music during activation is resumed.

  In the table of “Payout command error command” records in this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is “no deletion”, and the necessity of image restoration is The data indicating “No return”, the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is “center”, the data indicating the necessity of operation restriction is “limited”, the data showing the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is “ The data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be restored is "no return". In the record of “Discharge command error elimination command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “no erasure”, the data indicating the necessity of restoring the image "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of operation restriction is "-", data indicating the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction "canceled" The data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop", and the data indicating whether the background music needs to be restored is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception is the payout command error command, the display of the menu image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to the payout command error command is displayed in the menu image at the center of the screen. Overlap and display. Further, after this display, the operations of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E are restricted. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is maintained, and a message voice corresponding to the payout command error command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the payout command error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the payout command error command. In addition, after this deletion, the restriction on the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is released. In this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the payout command error command is stopped.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 82, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 82, power on specification during display of the shop setting image) If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a payout command error command, the display of the shop setting image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the shop setting image at the center of the screen corresponds to the payout command error command To display the message image. Further, after this display, the operations of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E are restricted. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is maintained, and a message voice corresponding to the payout command error command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the payout command error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the payout command error command. In addition, after this deletion, the restriction on the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is released. In this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the payout command error command is stopped.

  In the "door open error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "no deletion", and the necessity of image restoration is indicated. The data indicating "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "upper right corner", the data showing the necessity of operation restriction is "No restriction", the data showing the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is "-", Data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop", and data indicating whether the background music needs to be restored is "no return". In the record of "door open error cancellation command", the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", the data indicating the necessity of image restoration "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of operation restriction is "-", data indicating the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is "-", Data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stop", and data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 83, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before reception is the door open error command, the display of the menu image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to the door open error command is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen . Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the door open error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door open error command and outputs the message sound corresponding to the door open error command. Stop.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 84, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 84, power on specification during display of the shop setting image) If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a door open error command, the display of the store setting image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to the door open error command in the upper right corner of the screen Is displayed. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the door open error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is the door open error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the door open error command and outputs the message sound corresponding to the door open error command. Stop.

  In the "switch not connected error command" record of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "、", the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "erased", and the image restoration necessity is not necessary. The data indicating "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of operation restriction is "-", the data showing the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is " The data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "with a stop", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored is "no return". In the "switch not connected error elimination command" record, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the necessity of image restoration is indicated. The data is "return", the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data indicating the necessity of the operation restriction is "-", the data indicating the necessity of the operation restriction release is "-" The data indicating whether it is necessary to stop background music is "without stop", and the data showing whether it is necessary to restore background music is "with return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 85, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception is the switch non-connection error command, the menu image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the menu image invisible and correspond to the switch non-connection error command at the center of the screen Display the message image. Also, in this case, the output of background music during start-up in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and a message voice corresponding to the switch non-connection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the switch non-connection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the switch non-connection error command, and displays the menu image again. Also, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the switch non-connection error command is stopped, and the output of background music during activation is resumed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 86, power on specification during display of the shop setting image) When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the switch non-connection error command, the shop setting image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the shop setting image invisible and the switch is not connected at the center of the screen Display the message image corresponding to the error command. Also, in this case, the output of background music during start-up in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and a message voice corresponding to the switch non-connection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the switch non-connection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the switch non-connection error command, and displays the shop setting image again. Also, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the switch non-connection error command is stopped, and the output of background music during activation is resumed.

  In the record of “Magnet detection error command” of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “O”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “deletion”, and the necessity of restoration of the image is The data indicating "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of operation restriction is "-", the data showing the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is "- The data indicating whether or not to stop the background music is “no stop”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored is “no return”. In the record of “Magnet detection error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, the data indicating the necessity of restoration of the image "No return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of operation restriction is "-", data indicating the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is "-", Data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stop", and data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 87, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before reception is the magnet detection error command, the menu image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the menu image invisible and a message corresponding to the magnet detection error command is displayed at the center of the screen Display the image. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is a magnet detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command, and outputs the message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command. Stop. In this case, the background may be a single color (for example, red), and the display of the image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and the output of the sound may be continued until the gaming machine 1 is restarted.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 88, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a magnet detection error command, the store setting image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the store setting image invisible and the magnet detection error command is displayed at the center of the screen And display the corresponding message image. Further, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is a magnet detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 erases the message image corresponding to the magnet detection error command, and outputs the message sound corresponding to the magnet detection error command. Stop. In this case, the background may be a single color (for example, red), and the display of the image corresponding to the magnet detection error command and the output of the sound may be continued until the gaming machine 1 is restarted.

  Here, the data structure of the table shown in FIG. 70 is merely an example, and a table having a data structure different from this may be adopted. For example, in FIG. 70, only the no-ball error command and the no-ball error cancellation command have data in which the data indicating the necessity of command execution is “x”. However, with regard to the door open error command, data indicating the necessity of command execution is "X", and when the door open error command is received while the menu image or the setting image is displayed, the door open error command corresponds. The display of the message image and the output of the message sound may be restricted, and the door open error command may be ignored for the display of the image and the output of the sound. Also, for magnet detection error commands and vibration detection error commands that are unauthorized generation commands, data indicating whether it is necessary to stop background music is “stopped”, and unauthorized generation commands (magnet When a detection error command or a vibration detection error command is received, the menu image or setting image is erased and the background is turned to a specific color (for example, red) and the output of background music being activated is stopped, The corresponding message image may be displayed and a message voice may be output, and the display of the message image and the output of the message voice may be maintained until the gaming machine 1 is restarted.

  In step S1093-9 of FIG. 65, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is “execute” based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination process (the data of the command execution necessity is “no”). It is determined whether or not "o". If the sub CPU 120a determines that the command execution in the reception buffer is “execute” (S1093-9: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-10. When it is "do not execute" (S1093-9: No), the special command analysis process during the present menu image display control is ended.

  In step S1093-10, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination processing. If it is determined that the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" (S1093-10: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-11. If “no deletion” (S1093-10: No), the process proceeds to step S1093-13.

  In step S1093-11, the sub CPU 120a sets an image display restriction flag in the image display restriction flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Next, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the display image of the image display device 31 in the transmission buffer (S1093-12), and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1093-26. The deletion designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the current menu image display control. When receiving the deletion designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the display image (menu image, store setting image, RTC setting image, eco mode setting image, or debug mode setting image) of the image display device 31. While the image display restriction flag is set, the determination result in step S1082 (FIG. 55) of the menu image display control process (S1008 in FIG. 32) is “Yes”, and steps S1083 to S1090 are skipped. Erasure is maintained.

  Here, in step S1093-12, the display mode of the menu image or the setting image is changed (specifically, in place of the delete designation command for deleting the image, in order not to disturb the visual recognition of the message image corresponding to the receive command). Reduce the size of the menu image or setting image, move the display position of the menu image or setting image to a corner, increase the transparency of the menu image or setting image, change the display color of the menu image or setting image You may set the display mode change designation | designated command which instruct | indicates (display mode change such as).

  89 (a-1) and 89 (a-2) show an example of the change of the image display content of the image display device 31 in the modification in which the display mode change finger command is set in step S1093-12. FIG. As shown in FIG. 89 (a-1), when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 89 (a-1), the menu image is being displayed) If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the power-on designation command in step is a predetermined command (a magnet detection error command in the example of FIG. 89 (a-1)), the menu image size is reduced and the upper left The display mode of the image is changed such as moving to a corner, and the display area of the image corresponding to the received command is made open at the center of the screen. As shown in FIG. 89 (a-2), when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 89 (a-2), If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the power on designation command during display is the predetermined command (the magnet detection error command in the example of FIG. 89 (a-2)), the size of the store setting image is reduced Then, the image display mode is changed such that the image is moved to the upper left corner, and the display area of the image corresponding to the received command is made open at the center of the screen.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 89 (b-1) and 89 (b-2), in the modification in which the display mode change designation command is transmitted instead of the erasure designation command, a predetermined error (for example, a magnet detection error) After the display mode of the menu image or the setting image is changed due to the occurrence of the error, the menu image or the setting image may be returned to the original display mode when the error is eliminated.

  In step S1093-13 of FIG. 65, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of the operation restriction is “limited” based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing. If the sub CPU 120a determines that the necessity of the operation restriction is “restricted” (S1093-13: Yes), it proceeds to step S1093-14. When it is "no restriction" (S1093-13: No), it progresses to Step S1093-15.

  In step S1093-14, sub CPU 120a sets the operation restriction flag in the operation restriction flag storage area of sub RAM 120c, and after setting the flag, the process proceeds to step S1093-26.

  While the operation restriction flag is set, the determination result in step S1089 (FIG. 55) of the menu image display control process (S1008 in FIG. 32) is “Yes”, and the menu operation control process in step S1090 is skipped. Therefore, while the operation restriction flag is set, processing for invalidating the operation on the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is performed. On the other hand, while the operation restriction flag is not set, the determination result in step S1089 of the menu image display control process (S1008 in FIG. 32) is "No", and the menu operation control process in step S1090 is executed. For this reason, while the operation restriction flag is set, processing for validating the operation on the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is performed.

  Here, if a process to invalidate the operation on the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is performed while the operation restriction flag is set, the fact that the operation itself is not accepted is displayed instead. An operation sound (for example, a sound effect such as "bon") may be output from the audio output device 32.

  In step S1093-15 of FIG. 66, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of the image restoration is "with restoration" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing. If it is determined that the necessity of the image restoration is “returning” (S1093-15: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-16. If “no return” (S1093-15: No), the process proceeds to step S1093-26.

  In step S1093-16, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the image being erased in the image display device 31 is a store setting image (screen counter = 01). If the image being erased is the store setting image (S1093-16: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-17. When it is not a store setting image (S1090-16: No), it progresses to Step S1093-18.

  In step S1093-17, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the shop setting image in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1093-25. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the present menu image display control. When the display control command is received, the image control board 150 causes the shop setting image that was being erased to be displayed again.

  In step S1093-18, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the image being erased in the image display device 31 is an RTC setting image (screen counter = 02). When the image being erased is the RTC setting image (S1093-18: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-19. If the image is not an RTC setting image (S1093-18: No), the process proceeds to step S1093-20.

  In step S1093-19, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying an RTC setting image in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1093-25. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the present menu image display control. When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the RTC setting image that was being erased to be displayed again.

  In step S1093-20, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the image being erased in the image display device 31 is the eco mode setting image (screen counter = 03). If the image being erased is the eco mode setting image (S1093-20: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-21. When it is not an eco mode setting image (S1093-20: No), it progresses to step S1093-22.

  In step S1093-21, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the eco mode setting image in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1093-25. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the present menu image display control. When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the eco mode setting image that was being erased to be displayed again.

  In step S1093-22, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the image being erased in the image display device 31 is a debug mode setting image (screen counter = 04). If the image being erased is a debug mode setting image (S1093-22: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1093-23. If it is not the debug mode setting image (S1093-22: No), the process proceeds to step S1093-24.

  In step S1093-23, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the debug mode setting image in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1093-25. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the present menu image display control. When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 displays the debug mode setting image which was being erased again.

  In step S1093-24, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the main menu image in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1093-25. The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the present menu image display control. When the display control command is received, the image control board 150 causes the main menu image that was being erased to be displayed again.

  In step S1093-25, the sub CPU 120a clears the image display restriction flag in the image display restriction flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1077-15), and after clearing the flag, proceeds to step S1093-26.

  In step S1093-26, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the release of the operation restriction is necessary “released”. If the sub CPU 120a determines that the necessity for releasing the operation restriction is “released” (S1093-26: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1093-27. If it is "NO RELEASE" (S1093-26: NO), the process proceeds to step S1093-28.

  In step S1093-27, the sub CPU 120a clears the operation restriction flag of the sub RAM 120c, and after clearing the flag, proceeds to step S1093-28.

  If the operation restriction flag is cleared, the determination result in step S1089 (FIG. 55) after the special command analysis processing during the present menu image display control becomes “No”, and the menu operation control in step S1090 which has skipped so far Processing is performed. For this reason, thereafter, processing for validating the operation on the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is performed.

  In step S1093-28, the sub CPU 120a determines, based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination process, whether or not the necessity of the background music stop is "with stop". If the sub CPU 120a determines that the background music needs to be stopped is "with stop" (S1093-28: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1093-29. When it is "no stop" (S1093-28: No), it progresses to step S1093-30.

  In step S1093-29, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music stop designation command for stopping background music in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1093-32. The background music stop designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the current menu image display control. When the image control board 150 receives the background music stop designation command, the image control board 150 stops the output of the background music.

  In step S1093-30, sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of restoration of background music is "with restoration" based on the determination contents of the command execution mode determination processing. If the sub-CPU 120a determines that the background music needs to be restored is “return on” (S1093-30: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1093-31. If “no return” (S1093-30: No), the process proceeds to step S1093-32.

  In step S1093-31, the sub CPU 120a sets a background music designation command for outputting background music in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1093-32. The background music designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the menu image display control of this time. When the image control board 150 receives the background music designation command, the image control board 150 resumes the output of the starting background music which has been stopped.

  In step S1093-32, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation specification command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the command in the reception buffer in the transmission buffer, and after setting the command, the current menu image display control is in progress. End special command analysis processing. The operation specification command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process (S1095 in FIG. 55) after the special command analysis process during the present menu image display control. When receiving the command, the image control board 150 changes the display image of the image display device 31 according to the command, and changes the output sound of the audio output device 32.

  FIGS. 90 and 91 are flowcharts showing details of the game command analysis process (step S1094 in FIG. 55) during control of menu image display. In FIG. 90, the sub CPU 120a performs command execution mode determination processing (S1094-1). In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the menu operating game command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1094-1. As shown in FIG. 92, in this table, data indicating each type of game command, data indicating whether it is necessary to execute the command itself (“o” or “x”), menu image or setting image after receiving the command Data indicating whether it is necessary to delete the item (“with deletion” or “without deletion”), data indicating whether or not the menu image or setting image needs to be restored after receiving the command (“with return” or “without return”), command Data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command in the case of displaying both the menu image or the setting image and the image corresponding to the command after the reception (“upper right corner” or “center”), the menu image or Data indicating whether it is necessary to limit the operation when displaying both the setting image and the image corresponding to the command (“Limited” or “No limit”), Operation after receiving the command Data indicating whether it is necessary to release the limit (“released” or “no release”), data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped after receiving the command (“stopped” or “no stop”), and command reception Each set of data (“with return” or “without return”) indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored later is stored. When receiving a game command during display of a menu image or setting image, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 92, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and transmits the image to the image control board 150. The contents of one or both of the display image of the display device 31 and the output sound of the audio output device 32 are changed.

  More specifically, in the "variation start command" record of this table, the data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "O", the data indicating whether or not image deletion is necessary is "erased", and the image The data indicating the necessity of return is "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of operation restriction is "-", the necessity of canceling the operation restriction Data indicating "-", data indicating whether or not to stop background music is "with", and data indicating whether or not background music needs to be restored is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 93, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception is the fluctuation start command, the menu image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the menu image invisible and to display the symbol fluctuation image corresponding to the fluctuation start command . Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 94, power on specification during display of the shop setting image) When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the change start command, the store setting image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the store setting image invisible and the symbol change corresponding to the change start command Display the image. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the fluctuation start command is output.

  In the table of “start winning design designation command” in this table, data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “x”, data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “no deletion”, and the necessity of restoration of the image is The data indicating "No return", the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data indicating the necessity of the operation restriction is "-", the data indicating the necessity of the cancellation of the operation restriction is "- The data indicating whether or not to stop the background music is “no stop”, and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored is “no return”.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 95, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before reception is the start winning designation command, the display of the menu image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning designation command is restricted. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and the output of the audio corresponding to the start winning designation command is restricted. That is, when the start winning combination designation command is received while the menu image is displayed, the start winning combination designation command is ignored for the display of the image and the output of the voice.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 96, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 96, power on specification during display of the shop setting image) If the command received by the effect control board 120 before receiving the command is the start winning designation command, the display of the store setting image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the effect image corresponding to the start winning designation command is restricted. Do. Further, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and the output of the audio corresponding to the start winning designation command is restricted. That is, when the start winning combination designation command is received while the store setting image is displayed, the start winning combination designation command is ignored for the display of the image and the output of the voice.

  In the record of "opening specification command (special game start command)" of this table, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "erased", the image The data indicating the necessity of return is "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of operation restriction is "-", the necessity of canceling the operation restriction Data indicating "-", data indicating whether or not to stop background music is "with", and data indicating whether or not background music needs to be restored is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 97, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before reception is the special game start command, the menu image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the menu image invisible, and the effect image corresponding to the special game start command is displayed Let Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the special game start command is output.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 98, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 98, power on specification during display of the shop setting image) When the command received by the effect control board 120 before receiving the command is the special game start command, the store setting image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the store setting image invisible and correspond to the special game start command Display the effect image. Also, in this case, the output of the background music during activation in the voice output device 32 is stopped, and the effect sound corresponding to the special game start command is output.

  Here, the data structure of the table shown in FIG. 92 is merely an example, and a table having a data structure different from this may be adopted. For example, in the table of FIG. 92, only the fluctuation start command and the opening designation command are those for which data indicating “necessity” of the command execution is “o”. However, with regard to the round start command as well, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command is set as “〇”, and when the round start command is received while displaying the menu image or setting image, the menu image or setting image is deleted. It is also possible to display the effect image of the round game of the corresponding round, stop the output of the background music during activation, and output the effect sound of the round game of the corresponding round.

  The processing contents of each processing from step S1094-2 to step S1094-25 in FIG. 90 and FIG. 91 are the steps from step S1093-9 to FIG. 65, FIG. 66 and FIG. 67 (game command analysis processing during menu image display control) It is the same as the processing content of each processing of S1093-32.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the effect control board 120. The sub CPU 120a of the effect control board 120 finishes the initialization process and becomes able to play a game, and then every 2 milliseconds which is the generation cycle of the reset clock pulse in the reset clock pulse generator in the effect control board 120 A series of processes shown in FIG. 99 are executed.

  In FIG. 99, the sub CPU 120a saves the information in the register of the sub CPU 120a in the stack area (S1400).

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs timer update processing (S1500). In the timer update process, the sub CPU 120a updates the date and time information of the sub RAM 120c and updates various timers based on the time signal input from the RTC 120d.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs command analysis processing (S1600). In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the command in the reception buffer, and based on the analysis result, the image display device 31, the audio output device 32, the drive device for frame effect 33a, and the drive device 33b for 33b, 33c for panel effect The content of the effect by the effect lighting device 34 is determined, and a command indicating the content of the determined effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. Details of the procedure of the command analysis process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a demonstration effect control process (S1700). In the demonstration effect control process, the sub CPU 120a sets the start condition for waiting for customer demonstration effects (while the number of pendings is 0 and the effect pattern 36 is stopped and the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is not performed for a predetermined time When (for example, 90 seconds has elapsed) is established, a demonstration effect designating command for executing a customer waiting demonstration effect is set in the transmission buffer. Details of the demonstration effect control process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs effect input control processing (S1800). In the effect input control process, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the operation signals of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d and 39e of the center key 39E are input, and Do the processing. Details of the effect input control process will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a performs data output processing (S1900). In the data output process, the sub CPU 120a processes the timer update process of step S1500, the command analysis process of step S1600, the demonstration effect control process of step S1700, and the command stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c in the effect input control process of step S1800. It transmits to the control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a restores the information saved in the stack area in step S1400 to the register of the sub CPU 120a (S2000).

  FIGS. 100 and 101 are flowcharts showing the details of the command analysis process (step S1600 in FIG. 99). In FIG. 100, the sub CPU 120a checks whether or not there is a command received from the main control board 110 in the reception buffer (S1601). If there is a command in the reception buffer (S1601: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1602. If there is no command in the reception buffer (S1601: No), the current command analysis process is ended.

  In step S1602, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The customer waiting flag is a flag indicating that the customer waiting state (the number of holdings is 0 and the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are stopped). The customer waiting flag is set in step S1612, which will be described later, when the command in the reception buffer is a customer waiting specification command. If the customer waiting flag is not set (S1602: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1603. If the customer waiting flag is set (S1602: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1603, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the command in the reception buffer is an error command. When an error occurs while not waiting for customers (when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are moving or special games are being executed), the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the command in the reception buffer is an error command (S1603: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1604. If the command in the reception buffer is not an error command (S1603: No), the process proceeds to step S1605.

  In step S1604, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation specification command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the error command in the reception buffer, and proceeds to step S1611 after setting the command.

  The operation specification command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image control board 150 performs a process according to the command (displays an error message image on the image display device 31, A process of causing the voice output device 32 to output an error message voice is executed.

  In step S1605, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an error elimination command. If the error is eliminated when the customer is not waiting (when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are moving or special games are being executed), the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the command in the reception buffer is an error cancellation command (S1605: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1606. If the command in the reception buffer is not an error cancellation command (S1605: No), the process proceeds to step S1611.

  In step S1606, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation specification command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the error elimination command in the reception buffer, and after setting the command, the process proceeds to step S1611.

  The operation specification command set in the transmission buffer is sent to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image control board 150 performs a process according to the command (the image display device 31 erases the error message image, A process of causing the voice output device 32 to stop outputting the error message voice is executed.

  In step S1607, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the demonstration effect execution flag is set in the demonstration effect execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The demonstration effect execution flag is a flag indicating that a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed. The demonstration effect execution flag is a start condition for waiting for customer demonstration effects (with the number of reservations being 0 and the effect pattern 36 being stopped, the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the central key 39E are not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 90) Setting is made when the customer waiting demo effect is started (S1705 in FIG. 102), and a command is received from the main control board 110 during the customer waiting demo effect, or the effect button 35, cross When an operation to press the key 39 or the central key 39E is performed (S1609 in FIG. 100, S1806 in FIG. 103).

  If the demonstration effect execution flag is set (S1607: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1608. If the demonstration effect execution flag is not set (S1607: No), the process proceeds to step S1610.

  In step S1608, the sub CPU 120a generates a demonstration effect stop command for stopping the customer waiting demonstration effect being executed, and sets the demonstration effect stop command in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the sub CPU 120a clears the demonstration effect execution flag in the demonstration effect execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1609), and after clearing the flag, the process proceeds to step S1610.

  The demonstration effect stop command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 stop the demonstration effect.

  In step S1610, the sub CPU 120a performs control processing during command waiting for customer waiting, and proceeds to step S1611 after execution of control processing during command waiting for customer waiting. Details of the customer waiting command reception control process will be described later.

  In step S1611, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a customer waiting designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the customer waiting designation command (S1611: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1612. If the command in the reception buffer is not the customer waiting designation command (S1611: No), the process proceeds to step S1614.

  In step S1612, the sub CPU 120a sets a customer waiting flag in the customer waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Next, the sub CPU 120a initializes a timer for measuring the continuation time of the customer waiting state in the sub RAM 120c (S1613), and ends the current command analysis processing after the timer is initialized.

  In step S1614, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is the special symbol holding number specifying command. If the command in the reception buffer is the special symbol holding number designation command (S1614: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1615. When the command in the reception buffer is not the special symbol holding number designation command (S1614: No), the process proceeds to step 1616.

  In step S1615, the sub CPU 120a performs a special symbol hold number update process. In the special symbol hold number update process, the special symbol hold number specification command is analyzed, and the same hold number as that in the first special symbol hold number (U1) of the main RAM 110c in the effect first hold (Us1) storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Is stored, or the same holding number as that in the second special symbol holding number (U2) of the main RAM 110c is stored in the effect second holding (Us2) storage area of the sub RAM 120c.

  In step S1616, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a start winning combination designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is the start winning combination designation command (S1616: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1617. If the command in the reception buffer is not the start winning combination designation command (S1616: No), the process proceeds to step S1618.

  In step S1617, the sub CPU 120a performs pre-reading effect control processing, and ends the current command analysis processing after execution of pre-reading effect control processing. In pre-reading effect control processing, sub CPU120a analyzes the starting winning a prize specified command, decides the necessity of pre-reading effect on the basis of the analysis result. When executing the pre-reading effect, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specifying command of the pre-reading effect to be executed, and sets the effect pattern specifying command in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the pre-reading effect control process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image display under the control of the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 The device 31, the sound output device 32, the drive device for frame effect 33a, the drive devices for screen effect 33b and 33c, and the illumination device for effect 34 perform preview effect.

  In step S1618, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a symbol designation command (S1618: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1619. If the command in the reception buffer is not a symbol designation command (S1618: No), the process proceeds to step S1620.

  In step S1619, the sub CPU 120a performs rendering symbol determination processing, and ends the current command analysis processing after performing the rendering symbol determination processing. In the effect symbol determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the symbol specification command and determines the jackpot success or failure and the type of jackpot. The sub CPU 120a determines the stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, which are combinations of "losing", when the symbol designating command is "losing". Then, the sub CPU 120a stores the determined three stop symbol numbers in the effect symbol storage area in the sub RAM 120c and notifies the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 of the three stop symbol numbers. The stop symbol specification command is generated, and the generated stop symbol specification command is set in the transmission buffer.

  Further, when the symbol designation command is for "big hit", the sub CPU 120a determines the stop symbol numbers of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, which are combinations of "big hit". Then, the sub CPU 120a stores the determined three stop symbol numbers in the effect symbol storage area in the sub RAM 120c and notifies the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 of the three stop symbol numbers. The stop symbol specification command is generated, and the generated stop symbol specification command is set in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image display is performed under the control of the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 The device 31, the sound output device 32, the drive device for frame effect 33a, the drive devices for screen effect 33b and 33c, and the illumination device for effect 34 perform effects relating to symbol stop.

  In step S1620, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation start command. If the command in the reception buffer is a change start command (S1620: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1621. If the command in the reception buffer is not a change start command (S1620: No), the process proceeds to step S1626.

  In step S1621, the sub CPU 120a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. In the fluctuation effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a acquires the effect random number value updated in step S1100 (FIG. 31). The sub CPU 120a displays the character setting information of the character setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c from among the symbol variation effect pattern determination tables (not shown) of the characters A, B, C, D, E, and F in the sub ROM 120 b. Select the main character of. If character setting information is not stored in the character setting information storage area, a character shop setting information storage area is selected from among the symbol variation effect pattern determination tables (not shown) of the characters A, B, C, D, E, and F. The character store setting information (setting information set in the store setting image (FIG. 58)) of the character indicated by is selected. The sub CPU 120a refers to the selected symbol variation effect pattern determination table, determines the symbol variation effect pattern based on the combination of the variation start command of the variation and the effect random number value in the reception buffer, and the determined symbol The information on the variation production pattern is stored in the symbol variation production pattern storage area in the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the determined symbol variation effect pattern, and sets this effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

  The command set in the transmission buffer in the fluctuation effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image under control by the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 The display device 31, the sound output device 32, the drive device for frame effect 33a, the drive devices for screen effect 33b and 33c, and the illumination device for effect 34 perform effects relating to symbol variation.

  In step S1622, the sub CPU 120a performs gaming history information storage processing. In the game history information storage process, the sub CPU 120a is a big hit game history of the current game among the respective big hit game history information of each game (the current game, the previous game, the second previous game ...) in the sub RAM 120c. Update information Specifically, the sub CPU 120a updates the number of rotations of the current game's jackpot game history information (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol from the start of the current game to the current time) by +1. When the variation start command of the variation is a variation that stops with the symbol of "big hit", the sub CPU 120a is the number of big wins of the current game's big hit gaming history information (winning of the big hit from the start of the current game to the present) Update the number by +1.

  In step S1623, the sub CPU 120a executes a change start image switching control process, and ends the current command analysis process after executing this process. In the variation start time image switching control processing, a series of sub CPU 120a, a series of which is triggered by the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E while waiting for a customer as the variation display of the special symbol is started. Image (operation main image (Fig. 110), character selection image (Fig. 111), music selection image (Fig. 112), volume adjustment image (Fig. 113), new game start image (Fig. 114), new game QR code (registration Trademark image (FIG. 115), password input image (FIG. 117), game end image (FIG. 118), QR code (registered trademark) image for game end (FIG. 119), game history image (FIG. 121), or game It is determined whether or not any of the method explanation moving image (FIG. 122) (hereinafter referred to as “operation image”) is being displayed, and if the operation image is being displayed, it is erased To. Details of the change-over-time image switching control process will be described later.

  In step S1624, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the pachilog execution flag is set in the patilog execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The pachilog execution flag is a flag indicating that pochilog game is being executed. This pachilog execution flag is set when the authentication of the password input by the player in the password input image (information input request image, FIG. 117) of the pachilog game is successful (S1807-36 in FIG. 107), and the game end image of the pachilog game When the game end operation is performed in FIG. 118, the game is cleared (S1807-45 in FIG. 108).

  The sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1625 if the patilog execution flag is set in the patilog execution flag storage area (S1624 in FIG. 101: Yes). If the pachilog execution flag is not set (S1624: No), the current command analysis process is ended.

  In step S1625, the sub CPU 120a performs a pachi-log information storage process. In the patilog information storage process, the sub CPU 120a updates the patilog information in the sub RAM 120c. Specifically, the sub CPU 120a updates the number of revolutions of the pachilog information (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol from the start of the pachilog game to the present) by +1. The sub CPU 120a updates the number of jackpots of pachilog information (the number of jackpots from the start of pachilog game to the present) by +1 if the fluctuation start command of the fluctuation is the one that stops with the symbol of "big hit". Do. The sub CPU 120a adds effect information corresponding to the variation effect pattern stored in the effect pattern storage area to pachilog information and stores it.

  In step S1626, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a fluctuation stop command. If the command in the reception buffer is the variable stop command (S1626: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1627. If the command in the reception buffer is not a fluctuation stop command (S1626: No), the process proceeds to step S1628.

  In step S1627, the sub CPU 120a performs effect symbol stop processing, and ends the current command analysis processing after execution of the effect symbol stop processing. In the effect symbol stopping process, the sub CPU 120a generates a stop designating command for stopping the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R, and sets the stop designating command in the transmission buffer.

  The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer in the effect pattern stop process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and under the control of the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 The image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the drive device for frame effect 33a, the drive devices for screen effect 33b and 33c, and the illumination device for effect 34 perform effects relating to symbol stop.

  In step S1628, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. If the command in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command (S1628: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1629. If the command in the reception buffer is not the gaming state designation command (S1628: No), the process proceeds to step S1630.

  In step S1629, the sub CPU 120a performs gaming state setting processing, and ends the current analysis processing after execution of the gaming state setting processing. In the gaming state setting process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the gaming state designation command in the reception buffer to obtain the current gaming state, and stores gaming state information indicating the obtained gaming state in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 120c. .

  In step S1630, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an opening designation command (special game start command). If the command in the reception buffer is the opening designation command (S1630: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1631. If the command in the reception buffer is not the opening designation command (S1630: No), the process proceeds to step S1633.

  In step S1631, the sub CPU 120a performs a hit start effect pattern determination process, and ends the current command analysis process after executing the hit start effect pattern determination process. In the hit start effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the opening designation command in the reception buffer to determine a hit start effect pattern, and sets the information of the determined hit start effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Do. Further, the sub CPU 120a sets the determined effect pattern specifying command of the winning effect start pattern in the transmission buffer.

  The effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the hit start effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and controlled by the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. Below, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the frame effect drive device 33a, the board effect drive devices 33b and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 perform effects related to the opening of the special game.

  In step S1632, the sub CPU 120a executes the special game start image switching control process, and ends the current command analysis process after executing this process. In the special game start image switching control process, with the sub CPU 120a and the special game being started, it is determined whether or not the operation image is being displayed, and if the operation image is being displayed, it is erased . Details of the change-over-time image switching control process will be described later.

  In step S1633, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a round start command. If the command in the reception buffer is a round start command (S1633: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1634. If the command in the reception buffer is not a round start command (S1633: No), the process proceeds to step S1635.

  In step S1634, the sub CPU 120a performs jackpot effect pattern determination processing, and ends the current command analysis processing after execution of the jackpot effect pattern determination processing. In the jackpot effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes a round start command in the reception buffer to determine a jackpot effect pattern, and sets information on the determined jackpot effect pattern in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. Further, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the determined jackpot effect pattern, and sets this effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

  The effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the jackpot effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and controlled by the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. The image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the drive device for frame effect 33a, the drive devices for board effect 33b and 33c, and the illumination device for effect 34 perform effects related to the opening and closing of the special game winning hole.

  In step S1635, sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the command in the reception buffer is an ending specification command. If the command in the reception buffer is the ending designation command (S1635: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1636. If the command in the reception buffer is not the ending designation command (S1635: No), the current command analysis processing is ended.

  In step S1636, the sub CPU 120a performs a win end effect pattern determination process, and ends the current command analysis process after executing the win end effect pattern determination process. In this hit end effect pattern determination process, the sub CPU 120a analyzes the ending designation command in the reception buffer to determine a hit end effect pattern, and the information on the determined hit end effect pattern is stored in the effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 120c. set. In addition, the sub CPU 120a generates an effect pattern specification command of the determined win end effect pattern, and sets the effect pattern specification command in the transmission buffer.

  The effect pattern specification command set in the transmission buffer in the hit end effect pattern determination process is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and controlled by the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. Below, the image display device 31, the sound output device 32, the frame effect drive device 33a, the board effect drive devices 33b and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 perform effects related to the ending of the special game.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing details of the demonstration effect control process (S1700 in FIG. 99). In FIG. 102, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1701: Yes). If the customer waiting flag is set (S1701: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1702. When the customer waiting flag is not set (S1701: No), the present demonstration effect control process is ended.

  In step S1702, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the edit operation flag is set in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The edit operation flag is a flag indicating that the operation image has been displayed. The edit operation flag is set when an operation to press the effect button 35, the cross key 39 or the center key 39E is performed while waiting for a customer (step S1807-2 in FIG. 104), and a character is selected while the operation image is displayed, It is cleared when the music selection and volume adjustment selection / determination operation, the operation to cancel the start of the pachilog game, the operation to cancel the end of the pachilog game, or the operation to press the center key 39E is performed (S1807 in FIG. 105) 14, S1807-17, S1807-20, S1807-26 of FIG. 106, S1807-46 of FIG. 108, S1807-61 of FIG. Here, there is no operation to press any of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E for the operation that triggers the appearance of the operation image, and a specific button (for example, the effect button 35) It may be a pressing operation. When the edit operation flag is not set (S1702: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1703. When the edit operation flag is set (S1702: Yes), the present demonstration effect control process is ended.

  In step S1703, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the measurement value of the time measurement timer of the sub RAM 120c has reached a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds). The clocking timer is initialized at step S1613 (FIG. 100) of the command analysis process when the customer waiting designation command is received from the main control board 110. Start condition for waiting for customer demonstration effect (when predetermined number (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed without operation of production button 35, cross key 39 and central key 39E while the number of pendings is 0 and presentation symbol 36 is stopped) If is satisfied, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if it is not satisfied, the determination result of this step is "No". When the timer measurement value has reached a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) (S1703: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1704. If the timer measurement value has not reached the predetermined time (S1703: No), the present demonstration effect control process is ended.

  In step S1704, the sub CPU 120a generates a demonstration effect designation command for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect, and sets the demonstration effect designation command in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the sub CPU 120a sets a demonstration effect execution flag in the demonstration effect execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1705), and ends the present demonstration effect control process.

  The demonstration effect designating command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image display device 31 and the audio output device 32 wait for the customer demonstration effect under the control of the image control board 150. I do.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing details of the effect input control process (S1800 in FIG. 99). In step S1801, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not any operation signal of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, and the detection switches 35a, 39a, 39b, 39c, 39d, and 36e of the center key 39E is input. . If any one of the presentation button 35, the cross key 39, and the center key 39E is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if all are not pressed, the determination result of this step is "No" Become. If the sub CPU 120a determines that the operation signal is input (S1801: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1802. When it is determined that the operation signal is not input (S1801: No), the present effect input control process is ended.

  In step S1802, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether or not the customer waiting flag is set in the customer waiting flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. If the gaming machine 1 is in the customer waiting state, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if it is not in the customer waiting state (if the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are moving or special games are being executed) For example, the determination result of this step is "No". If the customer waiting flag is not set (S1802: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1803. If the customer waiting flag is set (S1802: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1804.

  In step S1803, the sub CPU 120a sets an operation designation command corresponding to the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E in the transmission buffer, and ends the present effect input control process after setting the command.

  The operation designation command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and under the control of the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140, the image display device 31 is performed. The sound output device 32, the frame effect drive device 33a, the board effect drive devices 33b and 33c, and the effect illumination device 34 are predetermined when triggered by the operation of the effect button 35, the cross key 39, or the center key 39E. Make a presentation.

  In step S1804, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the demonstration effect execution flag is set in the demonstration effect execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c. When the demonstration effect execution flag is set (S1804: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1805. If the demonstration effect execution flag is not set (S1804: No), the process proceeds to step S1807.

  In step S1805, the sub CPU 120a generates a demonstration effect stop command for stopping the customer waiting demonstration effect being executed, and sets the demonstration effect stop command in the transmission buffer. Thereafter, the sub CPU 120a clears the demonstration effect execution flag in the demonstration effect execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1806).

  The demonstration effect designation command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 stop the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  After execution of step S1806, the sub CPU 120a executes customer waiting operation control processing (S1807). FIG. 104, FIG. 105, FIG. 106, FIG. 107, and FIG. 108 are flowcharts showing the details of the customer waiting operation control process.

  In FIG. 104, the sub CPU 120a confirms whether the edit operation flag is set in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1807-1).

  When the edit operation flag is not set (S1807-1: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-2. If the edit operation flag is set (S1807-1: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1807-6.

  In step S1807-2, the sub CPU 120a sets an edit operation flag in the edit operation flag storage area. Next, the sub CPU 120a sets "00", which is data indicating the operation main image of the operation image, to the screen counter of the sub RAM 120c (S1807-3). The screen counter is identification information of various images displayed as an operation image. The relationship between the screen counter and each image is as shown in FIG. 109 (a). As shown in FIG. 109A, the screen counter = 00 corresponds to the operation main. The screen counter = 01 corresponds to the character selection. The screen counter = 02 corresponds to the music selection. The screen counter = 03 corresponds to the volume adjustment. The screen counter = 04 corresponds to the start of a new game. The screen counter = 05 corresponds to the new game QR code (registered trademark). The screen counter = 06 corresponds to password input. The screen counter = 07 corresponds to the end of the game. The screen counter = 08 corresponds to the game end QR code (registered trademark). The screen counter = 09 corresponds to the game history. The screen counter = 10 corresponds to the game method description.

  FIG. 110 is a display example of the operation main image. The operation main image is a character selection, a music selection, a volume adjustment, a new game start, a game end, a game history, each transition destination item of the game method explanation, an image imitating the cross key 39 and an image imitating the effect button 35 It consists of

  While this operation main image is being displayed, an operation to specify a transition destination is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. First, by operating the upper cursor key 39A and the lower cursor key 39B of the cross key 39, a desired one of the transition destination items is selected. After the desired transition destination item is selected, the effect button 35 is pressed to confirm the transition destination.

  FIG. 111 is a display example of the character selection image. The character selection image is an image showing the setting value candidates of the main character (characters A, B, C, D, E, F) in a display mode capable of identifying ones that are not based on the selected state. The character selection image includes thumbnail images of six types of characters A, B, C, D, E, and F, and a selected character display field indicating a character in the selected state (character B in the example of FIG. 111) among them. , And an image imitating the cross key 39 and an image imitating the effect button 35.

  While the character selection image is displayed, an operation to select the main character is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. First, by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, the character in the selected character display field is made desired. After changing the character in the selected character display field, the effect button 35 is pressed to confirm the character selection.

  When it is desired to return to the operation main image without selecting the main character, the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 112 is a display example of a music selection image. The music selection image is an image showing the setting value candidates of the normal music (music 1 to music 60) in a display mode that can distinguish one from the one in the selected state and one not. The music selection image includes 60 types of music 1, music 2... Music number of music 60, and a selected music display section indicating music (in the example of FIG. 112, music 20) among them. It consists of an image imitating the key 39 and an image imitating the effect button 35.

  During the display of the music selection image, an operation to select normal music is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. First, by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, the music in the selected music display section is made desired. After changing the music in the selected music display column, the effect button 35 is pressed to confirm the selection of the normal music.

  When it is desired to return to the operation main image without selecting music at normal time, the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 113 is a display example of the volume adjustment image. The volume adjustment image is an image showing a setting value candidate of the volume (volume 0 to volume 11) in a display mode that can distinguish one from the one in the selected state and one not. The volume adjustment image includes the characters “volume adjustment”, a volume indicator, a number indicating the volume (3 in the example of FIG. 113), an image simulating the cross key 39, and an image simulating the effect button 35 It consists of

  While the volume adjustment image is displayed, an operation to adjust the volume is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. By operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, the number of black level markers in the volume indicator is changed within the range of 0 (volume 0) to 11 (volume 11). After changing the level marker, the effect button 35 is pressed to fix the volume.

  When it is desired to return to the operation main image without adjusting the volume, the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 114 is a display example of a new game start image. As shown in FIG. 114, the new game start image has the characters “Do you want to start a new game? ※ data will be cleared up to the previous time”, “Yes” and “No” options, and the cross key It consists of an image imitating 39 and an image imitating the effect button 35.

  While this new game start image is being displayed, an operation to instruct start or stop of the pachilog game is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. When starting the pachilog game, the option of “Yes” is selected by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, and the effect button 35 is pressed. In order to cancel the start of the pachilog game, the "no" option is selected by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, and the effect button 35 is pressed.

  When it is desired to return to the operation main image without selecting "Yes" or "No", the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 115 is a display example of a new game QR code (registered trademark) image. The new game QR code (registered trademark) image is shifted by the selection of “Yes” of the new game start image. As shown in FIG. 115, for the new game QR code (registered trademark) image, the characters “Please obtain QR code (registered trademark) and access to a dedicated site.” And the QR code (registered trademark) , And an image imitating the effect button 35.

  While the new game QR code (registered trademark) image is being displayed, the camera of the portable terminal captures a QR code (registered trademark). As shown in FIG. 116, when the camera of the portable terminal captures a QR code (registered trademark), the portable terminal accesses the server of the pachilog site, and a password consisting of eight characters (CFGDVXCB in the example of FIG. 116) Display received and received password. After the password is displayed on the portable terminal, the effect button 35 is pressed.

  When it is desired to return to the operation main image without advancing to the next step, the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 117 is an example of a password input image. This password input image is an information input request image for requesting the input of information in order to log in to the server of the pachilog site. The password input image is shifted by pressing the effect button 35 while the new game QR code (registered trademark) image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 117, the password input image is composed of a password input field, characters of A, B,... Z, an image imitating the cross key 39, and an image imitating the effect button 35.

  While the password input image is displayed, an operation of inputting a password is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. First, by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, the same European character as the first password is selected, and the effect button 35 is pressed to confirm the first character. Thereafter, in the same manner, the second, third ... eighth characters are input.

  When it is desired to return to the operation main image without entering a password, the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 118 is a display example of the game end image. As shown in FIG. 118, the game end image has the characters “Do you want to generate a QR code (registered trademark) corresponding to the current game record?”, “Yes” and “No” options, and a cross It consists of an image imitating the key 39 and an image imitating the effect button 35.

  While this game end image is being displayed, an operation for instructing the end of the pachilog game or the cancellation thereof is possible. The procedure of operation is as follows. When ending the pachilog game, the option “Yes” is selected by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, and the effect button 35 is pressed. In order to cancel the end of the pachilog game, the option "No" is selected by operating the left cursor key 39C and the right cursor key 39D of the cross key 39, and the effect button 35 is pressed.

  When it is desired to return to the operation main image without advancing to the next step, the center key 39E is pressed.

  FIG. 119 is a display example of a game completion QR code (registered trademark) image. The game end QR code (registered trademark) image is shifted by the selection of “Yes” of the game end image. As shown in FIG. 119, the QR code (registered trademark) image for ending the game is the characters "Please obtain a QR code (registered trademark) and access a dedicated site." And the QR code (registered trademark) It consists of

  During display of the game completion QR code (registered trademark) image, the camera of the portable terminal captures a QR code (registered trademark). As shown in FIG. 120, when the camera of the portable terminal captures a QR code (registered trademark), the portable phone accesses the server of the pachilog site, uploads pachilog gaming information of the current pachilog game, and the current pachilog game Display the number of rotations of the information, the number of big wins, and the points earned based on them.

  FIG. 121 is a display example of a game history image. This game history image is displayed as a list of the last game, the second previous game, the third previous game...

  FIG. 122 shows a display example of a game method explanation moving image. The game method explanation moving image is a moving image consisting of a series of frame images from the first "rent a ball" to the last "let's try it!".

  In FIG. 104, the sub CPU 120a sets "00", which is data indicating character selection, to the selection counter of the sub RAM 120c (S1807-4). The selection counter is identification information of seven transition destination items in the operation main image (FIG. 110). The relationship between the selection counter and the transfer destination item is as shown in FIG. 109 (b). As shown in FIG. 109 (b), the selection counter = 00 corresponds to the transfer destination item of character selection in the operation main image. The selection counter = 01 corresponds to the transfer destination item of the music selection in the operation main image. The selection counter = 02 corresponds to the transition destination item of the volume adjustment in the operation main image. The selection counter = 03 corresponds to the transition destination item of the new game start in the operation main image. The selection counter = 04 corresponds to the transition destination item of the game end in the operation main image. The selection counter = 05 corresponds to the transfer destination item of the game history in the operation main image. The selection counter = 06 corresponds to the transition destination item of the game method description in the operation main image.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the operation main image in the transmission buffer based on the data set in the screen counter and the data set in the selection counter (S1807-5) .

  This display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1900. When receiving the display designation command, the image control board 150 causes the operation main image to be displayed as a display image of the image display device 31.

  In step S1807-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the input signal that triggered the current waiting customer operation control process is from the effect button detection switch 35a of the effect button 35. If the effect button 35 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the cross key 39 or the center key 39E is pressed, the determination result of this step is "No". If the input signal is not from the effect button detection switch 35a (S1807-6: No), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-7 and performs selection button determination processing. Details of this selection button determination process will be described later. If the input signal is from the effect button detection switch 35a (S1807-6: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-8.

  In step S1807-8, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is the operation main image (screen counter = 00). If the display image is the operation main image (S1807-8: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-9. If the display image is not the operation main image (S1807-8: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-12.

  In step S1807-9, the sub CPU 120a updates the screen counter to data corresponding to the transition destination based on the current selection counter. Specifically, if the selection counter is "00", the sub CPU 120a sets the screen counter to "01". If the selection counter is "01", the screen counter is set to "02". If the selection counter is "02", the screen counter is set to "03". If the selection counter is "03", the screen counter is set to "04". If the selection counter is "04", the screen counter is set to "07". If the selection counter is "05", the screen counter is set to "09". If the selection counter is "06", the screen counter is set to "10".

  In step S1807-10, the sub CPU 120a performs a transition preparation process based on the screen counter after the update in step S1807-9, and proceeds to step S1807-11 after the preparation process ends. More specifically, in this preparation process, if the screen counter after updating is 01 (transition destination is character selection), data corresponding to the character setting information of the character setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c to the character counter of the sub RAM 120c. Set If there is no character setting information in the character setting information storage area, data corresponding to the character shop setting information (setting information set in the store setting image (FIG. 58)) of the character shop setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c in the character counter Set

The character counter is data for selecting the store setting value of the main character from among A, B, C, D, E, and F. A character counter = 00 corresponds to the character A, a character counter = 01 corresponds to the character B, and a character counter = 05 corresponds to the character F, respectively.

  Further, in this preparation process, if the screen counter after updating is 02 (the migration destination is music selection), data corresponding to the music setting information in the music setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set to the music counter of the sub RAM 120c. . If there is no music setting information in the music setting information storage area, data corresponding to the music shop setting information (setting information set in the shop setting image (FIG. 58)) of the music shop setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c in the music counter Set

  The music counter is data for selecting a store setting value of normal music within a range of 1 to 60. The music counter = 00 corresponds to the music 1, the music counter = 01 corresponds to the music 2,... The music counter = 59 corresponds to the music 60, respectively.

  Further, in this preparation process, if the screen counter after updating is 03 (the transfer destination is volume adjustment), data corresponding to the volume setting information of the volume setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c is set to the volume counter of the sub RAM 120c. . If there is no volume setting information in the volume setting information storage area, data corresponding to the volume store setting information (setting information set in the store setting image (FIG. 58)) of the volume store setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c in the volume counter Set

  The volume counter is data for selecting the store setting value of the volume within the range of 0-11. Volume counter = 00 corresponds to volume 0, volume counter = 01 corresponds to volume 1 ... volume counter = 11 corresponds to volume 11, respectively.

  Further, in this preparation process, if the screen counter after updating is 04 (the transfer destination is the start of a new game) or 07 (the transfer destination is the game end), 00 is set to the YN counter of the sub RAM 120c. The YN counter is data for selecting one of two options “Yes” and “No”. YN counter = 00 corresponds to "Yes". YN counter = 01 corresponds to "No".

  Further, in this preparation process, if the screen counter after updating is 09 (the transfer destination is the game history), each time of the previous, two times before, three times before ... in the big hit game history information storage area of the sub RAM 120c. The jackpot gaming history information is read out, and a gaming history list in which these jackpot gaming history information are arranged in order from the new one is generated.

  In step S1807-11, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the image of the transition destination in the transmission buffer, and ends the current customer waiting operation control process after setting the command.

  This display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1900. The image control board 150 changes the display image of the image display device 31 to the image of the transfer destination. Further, when the image control board 150 receives the display instruction command of the game method explanation moving image, the image control board 150 starts reproduction of the moving image (FIG. 122) of the game method.

  In step S1807-12, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a character selection image (screen counter = 01). If a selection confirmation operation (operation to press the effect button 35) is performed on the character selection image, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the display image is a character selection image (S1807-12: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-13. If the image is not a character selection image (S1807-12: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-15.

  In step S1807-13, the sub CPU 120a updates the character setting information in the character setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c to that of the character which has been in the selected state at the time of the selection and confirmation operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35). Then, the sub CPU 120a clears the edit operation flag in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1807-14), and ends the current customer waiting operation control process after clearing the flag.

  The processes of steps S1807-13 and S1807-14 will be described in detail. As shown in the example of FIG. 123A, the character in the selected state in the selected character display column of the character selection image is displayed at the display time of the character selection image. Change from character to another character (in the example of FIG. 123 (a), character B (character counter = 01) → character E (character counter = 05), and after this change, the selection and confirmation operation (operation to press the effect button 35) In step S1807-13, the character setting information of the character setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c is selected based on the character in the selected state at the time of the selection confirmation operation (character E in the example of FIG. 123A). Update

  In this case, when the edit operation flag is cleared in the next step S1807-14, the determination result of step S1807-1 (FIG. 104) of the customer waiting operation control process (S1807 in FIG. 103) in the timer interrupt process thereafter. Becomes "No", and the process proceeds from S1807-2 S1807-3 S1807-4 S1807-5, the display instruction command of the operation main image is set again, and the display image of the image display device 31 is the operation main image Return. Thereafter, in the variation effect pattern determination process (step S1621 in FIG. 101) triggered by the reception of the variation start specification command, an example of the character (FIG. 123A) indicated by the updated character setting information in the character setting information storage area Then, the symbol variation presentation pattern determination table of the character E) is selected.

  In step S1807-15 in FIG. 105, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a music selection image (screen counter = 02). If a selection confirmation operation (operation to press the effect button 35) is performed on the music selection image, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the display image is a music selection image (S1807-15: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-16. When it is not a music selection image (S1807-15: No), it progresses to step S1807-18.

  In step S1807-16, the sub CPU 120a updates the music setting information in the music setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c with the music of the music selected at the time of the selection and confirmation operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35). Then, the sub CPU 120a clears the edit operation flag in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1807-17), and ends the current customer waiting operation control process after clearing the flag.

  The processes of steps S1807-16 and S1807-17 will be described in detail. As shown in the example of FIG. 124 (a), the music in the selected state in the selected music display column of the music selection image is displayed at the display time of the music selection image. Change from music to another music (in the example of FIG. 124 (a), music 30 (music counter = 29) → music 40 (music counter = 39)), and after this change, the selection and confirmation operation (operation to press the effect button 35) In step S1807-16, the music setting of the music setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c is performed based on the music in the selected state at the time of the selection confirmation operation (the music 40 in the example of FIG. 124 (a)). Update information

  In this case, when the edit operation flag is cleared in the next step S1807-17, the processing in step S1807-5 (FIG. 104) of the customer waiting operation control processing (S1807 in FIG. 103) in the timer interrupt processing thereafter is performed. Then, the display image of the image display device 31 returns to the operation main image. Thereafter, the music output when the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C, and the right symbol 36R are normally changed is indicated by the music setting information after updating in the music setting information storage area (in the example of FIG. 124 (a) It becomes music 40).

  In step S1807-18 in FIG. 105, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current display image of the image display device 31 is a volume adjustment image (screen counter = 03). If a selection confirmation operation (operation to press the effect button 35) is performed on the volume adjustment image, the determination result of this step is "Yes". If the display image is a volume adjustment image (S1807-18: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-19. If it is not the volume adjustment image (S1807-18: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-21.

  In step S1807-19, the sub CPU 120a updates the sound volume setting information of the sound volume setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c to that of the sound volume selected at the time of the selection and confirmation operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35). Then, the sub CPU 120a clears the edit operation flag in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1807-20), and ends the current customer waiting operation control process after clearing the flag.

  The processes of steps S1807-19 and S1807-20 will be described in detail. As shown in the example of FIG. 125A, the volume (number of black level markers) of the selected state in the volume indicator of the volume adjustment image is The volume is changed from the volume at the time of display of the adjustment image (in the example of FIG. 125 (a), volume 4 (volume counter = 04) → volume 8 (volume counter = 08)), and after this change, the selection confirmation operation (effect button 35 When the pressing operation is performed, in step S1807-19, the volume of the volume setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c is selected based on the volume of the selected state at the time of the selection confirmation operation (volume 8 in the example of FIG. 125A). Update configuration information.

  In this case, when the edit operation flag is cleared in the next step S1807-20, the process in step S1807-5 (FIG. 104) of the customer waiting operation control process (S1807 in FIG. 103) in the timer interrupt process thereafter is performed. Then, the display image of the image display device 31 returns to the operation main image. After this, the sound of the audio output device 32 is output at the updated volume (volume 8 in the example of FIG. 125 (a)).

  In step S1807-21 of FIG. 106, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current display image of the image display device 31 is a new game start image (screen counter = 04). If the display image is a new game start image (S1807-21: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-22. If it is not a new game start image (S1807-21: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-27.

  In step S1807-22, the sub CPU 120a refers to the YN counter of the sub RAM 120c, and determines whether or not YN counter = 00. If the YN counter = 00 (S1807-22: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-23. If the YN counter is not 00 (S1807-22: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-26.

  In step S1807-23, the sub CPU 120a updates the screen counter to "05" which is data corresponding to the new game QR code (registered trademark) image. Next, the sub CPU 120a performs QR code (registered trademark) generation processing (S1807-24). In this QR code (registered trademark) generation process, the sub CPU 120a reads the address of the patilog site from the sub ROM 120b, reads patilog information (number of revolutions, number of big hits, effect information) from the patilog information storage area of the sub RAM 120c, The date and time information of the date and time information storage area of the RAM 120c is read as game start date and time information, and a QR code (registered trademark) is generated based on the information. The QR code (registered trademark) obtained in this manner includes the address of the pachilog site, pachilog information, and game start date and time information.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying a new game QR code (registered trademark) image including the QR code (registered trademark) obtained in step S1807-24 in the transmission buffer (S1807-25) ), And after the setting of the command, the present customer waiting operation control process is ended.

  The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image control board 150 changes the display image of the image display device 31 to a new game QR code (registered trademark) image.

  In step S1807-26, the sub CPU 120a clears the edit operation flag in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current customer waiting operation control process after clearing the flag.

  When the edit operation flag is cleared, the display image of the image display device 31 is operated through the processing of step S1807-5 (FIG. 104) of the customer waiting operation control processing (S1807 of FIG. 103) in the timer interrupt processing thereafter. Return to the main image.

  In step S1807-27, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a new game QR code (registered trademark) image (screen counter = 05). If the display image is a new game QR code (registered trademark) image (S1807-27: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-28. If it is not a new game QR code (registered trademark) image (S1807-27: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-31.

  In step S1807-28, the sub CPU 120a updates the screen counter to “06” which is data corresponding to the password input image (information input request image). Next, the sub CPU 120a performs transition preparation processing based on the screen counter after the update in step S1807-28 (S1807-29). Specifically, in this preparation process, "00" which is data corresponding to "A" is set in the European character counter of the sub RAM 120c.

  Here, the European character counter is data for selecting one of the 26 European characters “A” to “Z”. The European character counter = 00 corresponds to "A", the European character counter = 01 to "B", and the European character counter = 25 to "Z".

  Next, the sub CPU 120a generates a display designation command for displaying a password input image (information input request image) based on the data set in the screen counter and the European character counter, and transmits this display designation command. It sets to a buffer (S1807-30), and after setting of a command, this customer waiting operation control processing is complete | finished.

  The display designation command is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image control board 150 changes the display image of the image display device 31 to a password input image (information input request image).

  In step S1807-31 of FIG. 107, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a password input image (information input request image) (screen counter = 06 or not). If the display image is a password input image (S1807-31: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-32. If the image is not a password input image (S1807-31: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-39.

  In step S1807-32, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the input of the password is completed. If the sub CPU 120a completes the input of the password (S1807-32: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-33. If the password input has not been completed (S1807-32: No), the current customer waiting operation control process is ended.

  In step S1807-32, the sub CPU 120a performs password authentication processing. In the password authentication process, the sub CPU 120a collates the input password with a password generated by a predetermined algorithm.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a determines the success or failure of the authentication of the password authentication process (S1807-34). If the sub CPU 120a succeeds in the authentication (S1807-34: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-35. If the authentication fails (S1807-34: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-38.

  In step S1807-35, the sub CPU 120a performs pachilog initialization processing. In the patilog initialization process, the sub CPU 120a clears patilog information (number of revolutions, number of big hits, effect information) of the sub RAM 120c. Next, the sub CPU 120a sets a pachilog execution flag in the patilog execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1807-36). Next, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying the authentication success image in the transmission buffer (S1807-37). After execution of the command, the current customer waiting operation control process is ended.

  In step S1807-38, the sub CPU 120a sets a display designation command for displaying an authentication failure image in the transmission buffer, and ends the current customer waiting operation control process after setting the command.

  In step S1807-39 of FIG. 108, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current display image of the image display device 31 is a game end image (screen counter = 07). If the display image is the game end image (S1807-39: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-40. When it is not the game end image (S1807-39: No), the current customer waiting operation control process is ended.

  In step S1807-40, the sub CPU 120a refers to the YN counter of the sub RAM 120c, and determines whether YN counter = 00. If the YN counter = 00 (S1807-40: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-41. If the YN counter is not 00 (S1807-40: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-46.

  In step S1807-41, the sub CPU 120a updates the screen counter to "08" which is data corresponding to the game end QR code (registered trademark) image. Next, the sub CPU 120a performs QR code (registered trademark) generation processing (S1807-42). In this QR code (registered trademark) generation process, the sub CPU 120a reads the address of the patilog site from the sub ROM 120b, reads patilog information (number of revolutions, number of big hits, effect information) from the patilog information storage area of the sub RAM 120c, The date and time information of the date and time information storage area of the RAM 120c is read as game end date and time information, and a QR code (registered trademark) is generated based on the information. The QR code (registered trademark) obtained in this manner includes the address of the pachilog site, pachilog information, and game end date and time information.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, a display designation command for displaying a game end QR code (registered trademark) image including the QR code (registered trademark) obtained in step S1807-42 (S1807-43) ). Next, the sub CPU 120a performs a patilog initialization process (S1807-44). In the patilog initialization process, the sub CPU 120a clears patilog information (number of revolutions, number of big hits, effect information) of the sub RAM 120c. Next, the sub CPU 120a clears the pachilog execution flag in the patilog execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1807-45), and after clearing the flag, ends the current customer waiting operation control process.

  The display designation command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image control board 150 converts the display image of the image display device 31 into a QR code (registered trademark) image for game termination. change.

  In step S1807-46, the sub CPU 120a clears the edit operation flag in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current customer waiting operation control process after clearing the flag.

  When the edit operation flag is cleared, the display image of the image display device 31 is operated through the processing of step S1807-5 (FIG. 104) of the customer waiting operation control processing (S1807 of FIG. 103) in the timer interrupt processing thereafter. Return to the main image.

  FIGS. 127 and 128 are flowcharts showing the details of the selection button determination process (S1807-7 in FIG. 104). In FIG. 127, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the input signal that triggered the current waiting for customer operation control process is from the central key detection switch 39e of the central key 39E (S1807-60). If the center key 39E is pressed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and if the cross key 39 is pressed, the determination result of this step is "No". If the input signal is from the central key detection switch 39e (S1807-60: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-61. If the input signal is not from the central key detection switch 39e (S1807-60: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-62.

  In step S1807-61, the sub CPU 120a clears the edit operation flag in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current selection button determination processing after clearing the flag.

  When the edit operation flag is cleared, the display image of the image display device 31 is operated through the processing of step S1807-5 (FIG. 104) of the customer waiting operation control processing (S1807 of FIG. 103) in the timer interrupt processing thereafter. Return to the main image.

  In step S1807-62, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is the operation main image (screen counter = 00). If the display image is the operation main image (S1807-62: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-63. If it is not the operation main image (S1807-62: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-64.

  In step S1807-63, the sub CPU 120a updates the selection counter based on the type of the cross key 39, and after the update, the process proceeds to step S1807-76. Specifically, if the signal from the detection switch 39a of the upper cursor key 39A is input, the selection counter is updated by -1 and the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39b of the lower cursor key 39B is input. Then, the selection counter is updated by +1.

  In step S1807-64, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a character selection image (screen counter = 01). If the display image is a character selection image (S1807-64: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-65. If the image is not a character selection image (S1807-64: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-66.

  In step S1807-65, the sub CPU 120a updates the character counter based on the type of the cross key 39, and after the update, the process proceeds to step S1807-76. Specifically, if a signal from the cross key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C is input, the character counter is decremented by 1 and the signal from the cross key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is input. If so, the character counter is updated by +1.

  In step S1807-66, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a music selection image (screen counter = 02). If the display image is a music selection image (S1807-66: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-67. When it is not a music selection image (S1807-66: No), it progresses to step S1807-68.

  In step S1807-67, the sub CPU 120a updates the music counter based on the type of the cross key 39 and, after the update, proceeds to step S1807-76. Specifically, if the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C is input, the music counter is updated by 1 and the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is input If so, the music counter is updated by +1.

  In step S1807-68, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a volume adjustment image (screen counter = 03). If the display image is a volume adjustment image (S1807-68: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-69. If it is not the volume adjustment image (S1807-68: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-70.

  In step S1807-69, the sub CPU 120a updates the volume counter based on the type of the cross key 39, and after the update, the process proceeds to step S1807-76. Specifically, if the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C is input, the volume counter is updated by -1 and the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is input If it is, update the volume counter by +1.

  In step S1807-70, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a new game start image (screen counter = 04). If the display image is a new game start image (S1807-70: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-71. If it is not a new game start image (S1807-70: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-72.

  In step S1807-71, the sub CPU 120a updates the YN counter based on the type of the cross key 39. After the update, the process proceeds to step S1807-76. Specifically, if the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C is input, the YN counter is updated by 1 and the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is input If so, the YN counter is incremented by +1.

  In step S1807-72, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a password input image (information input request image) (screen counter = 06). If the display image is a password input image (S1807-72: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-73. If the image is not a password input image (S1807-72: No), the process proceeds to step S1807-74.

  In step S1807-73, sub CPU 120a updates the European character counter based on the type of cross key 39, and after the update, the process proceeds to step S1807-76. Specifically, if the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C is input, the European character counter is decremented by 1 and the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is updated. If it has been input, it is updated by incrementing the European character counter.

  In step S1807-74, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the current display image of the image display device 31 is the game end image (screen counter = 07). If the display image is the game end image (S1807-74: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1807-75. When it is not the game end image (S1807-74: No), it progresses to step S1807-76.

  In step S1807-75, the sub CPU 120a updates the YN counter based on the type of the cross key 39. After the update, the process proceeds to step S1807-76. Specifically, if the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39c of the left cursor key 39C is input, the YN counter is updated by 1 and the signal from the arrow key detection switch 39d of the right cursor key 39D is input If so, the YN counter is incremented by +1.

  In step S1807-76, the sub CPU 120a determines the image after the change based on the screen counter, selection counter, character counter, music counter, volume counter, YN counter, and European character counter, and displays this image. The display specification command is generated, and the generated display specification command is set in the transmission buffer.

  The display designation command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 150 in the data output process of step S1900, and the image control board 150 changes the display image of the image display device 31.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing details of the customer waiting command reception control process (step S1610 in FIG. 100). In FIG. 129, the sub CPU 120a checks whether or not the command in the reception buffer is a special command (a command described as “special command” in FIG. 9) (S1610-1). If the command in the reception buffer is a special command (S1610-1: YES), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610-2. If the command in the reception buffer is not a special command (S1610-1: No), the process proceeds to step S1610-6.

  In step S1610-2, the sub CPU 120a performs command execution mode determination processing. In this command execution mode determination process, the sub CPU 120a determines the execution mode of the command in the reception buffer based on the customer waiting command execution mode determination table of the sub ROM 120b.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a customer waiting command execution mode determination table referenced in step S1610-2. In this table, data indicating each type of special command, data indicating whether it is necessary to execute the command itself (“〇” or “x”), and data indicating whether it is necessary to delete the operation image after receiving the command ( Each set of "with erasure" or "without erasure" is stored. When the sub CPU 120a receives a special command during display of the operation image, it determines an execution mode of the command according to the table of FIG. 130, transmits a predetermined command to the image control board 150, and transmits the image display device 31 to the image control board 150. The contents of one or both of the display image and the output sound of the audio output device 32 are changed.

  More specifically, in the "overdelivery error command" record of this table, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "o", and data indicating whether or not image deletion is necessary is "no erasure". ing.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 131, when the image control board 150 is displaying a password input image (information input request image) as a display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is If the command is a payout excess error command, the display of the password input image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a payout excess error command and a corresponding message image are superimposed and displayed.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 132, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game history image as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is the overdelivery error command. In this case, the display of the game history image on the image display device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to the payout excess error command is superimposed and displayed on the game history image.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 133, when the command received by the effect control board 120 while displaying the game method explanation moving image as the display image of the image display device 31 is the overdelivery error command, the image display The display of the game method explanation moving image in the device 31 is maintained, and a message image corresponding to a payout excess error command is superimposed and displayed on the game method explanation moving image.

  Further, in the record of "power on designation command" of this table, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "o", and data indicating whether or not image deletion is necessary is "erased".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 134, when the image control board 150 is displaying a password input image (information input request image) as a display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is If the command is a power on designation command, the password input image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the password input image invisible, and a message image corresponding to the power on designation command is displayed. In this case, the initialization process (step S1000 in FIG. 31) may be executed from the beginning, triggered by the reception of the power on designation command.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when the image control board 150 is displaying a game history image as a display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is the power on designation command. In this case, the game history image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game history image invisible, and a message image corresponding to the power on designation command is displayed. In this case, the initialization process (step S1000 in FIG. 31) may be executed from the beginning, triggered by the reception of the power on designation command.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game method explanation moving image as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is the power on designation command If it is, the game method explanation moving image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game method explanation moving image invisible, and a message image corresponding to the power on designation command is displayed. In this case, the initialization process (step S1000 in FIG. 31) may be executed from the beginning, triggered by the reception of the power on designation command.

  Further, in the record of "power restoration specification command" of this table, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is "o", and data indicating whether or not deletion of the image is necessary is "erased".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 137, when the image control board 150 is displaying a password input image (information input request image) as a display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is If the command is the power recovery specification command, the password input image is erased in the image display device 31 so that the password input image is not visible, and a message image corresponding to the power recovery specification command is displayed. In this case, the initialization process (step S1000 in FIG. 31) may be executed from the beginning, triggered by the reception of the power supply recovery designation command.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 138, when the image control board 150 is displaying a game history image as a display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is the power restoration designation command. In this case, the game history image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game history image invisible, and a message image corresponding to the power supply recovery designation command is displayed. In this case, the initialization process (step S1000 in FIG. 31) may be executed from the beginning, triggered by the reception of the power supply recovery designation command.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 139, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game method explanation moving image as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is the power recovery designation command. If it is, the game method explanation moving image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game method explanation moving image invisible, and a message image corresponding to the power supply recovery designation command is displayed. In this case, the initialization process (step S1000 in FIG. 31) may be executed from the beginning, triggered by the reception of the power supply recovery designation command.

  In FIG. 129, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is "execute" based on the determined contents of the command execution mode determination process (the data of the command execution necessity is "o") Or not) is judged (S1610-3). If the sub CPU 120 a determines that “execution of the command in the reception buffer is required” (S 1610-3: Yes), the sub CPU 120 a proceeds to step S 1610-4. When the execution necessity of the command in the reception buffer is "do not execute" (S1610-3: No), the control processing at the time of receiving the current customer waiting command is ended.

  In step S1610-4, the sub CPU 120a sets, in the transmission buffer, an operation designation command for causing the image control board 150 to perform processing corresponding to the command in the reception buffer.

  Next, the sub CPU 120a determines whether or not the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" based on the determination content of the command execution mode determination processing (S1610-5). If it is determined that the necessity of the image deletion is "with deletion" (S1610-5: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610-6. When it is "no deletion" (S1610-5: No), the control processing at the time of the current customer waiting command reception is ended.

  In step S1610-6, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a character selection image (screen counter = 01). If the display image is a character selection image (S1610-6: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610-7. If the image is not a character selection image (S1610-6: No), the process proceeds to step S1610-8.

  In step S1610-7, sub CPU 120a updates the character setting information in the character setting information storage area of sub RAM 120c to that of the character that was in the selected state immediately before the display of the character selection image, and after the update in step S1610-12. move on.

  In step S1610-8, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a music selection image (screen counter = 02). If the display image is a music selection image (S1610-8: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610-9. When it is not a music selection image (S1610-8: No), it progresses to step S1610-10.

  In step S1610-9, the sub CPU 120a updates the music setting information in the music setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c based on the music shop setting information set in the shop setting image (FIG. 58), and after the updating, in step S1610-12. move on.

  In step S1610-10, the sub CPU 120a determines whether the current display image of the image display device 31 is a volume adjustment image (screen counter = 03). If the display image is a volume adjustment image (S1610-10: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1610-1. If it is not the volume adjustment image (S1610-10: No), the process proceeds to step S1610-12.

  In step S1610-1, the sub CPU 120a updates the volume setting information in the volume setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c to that of the volume selected at the time of reception of the command, and proceeds to step S1610-12 after the update.

  In step S1610-12, the sub CPU 120a displays the display image of the image display device 31 (operation main image, character selection image, music selection image, volume adjustment image, new game start image, password input image (information input request image), new Set the delete designation command for deleting the QR code for game (registered trademark) image, the game end image, the QR code for game end (registered trademark) image, the game history image, or the game method explanation moving image) in the transmission buffer Do. Next, the sub CPU 120a clears the edit operation flag in the edit operation flag storage area of the RAM 120c and the customer wait flag in the customer wait flag storage area (S1610-13), and after clearing the flag, control at the time of receiving the current customer wait command End the process.

  When the image control board 150 receives the delete designation command, the image control board 150 deletes the operation image. Here, in step S1610-12, instead of the deletion designation command for deleting the image, the display mode of the operation image is changed so as not to prevent the visual recognition of the message image corresponding to the reception command (specifically, the operation Display mode change specification command that instructs to change the display mode such as reducing the size of the image, moving the display position of the operation image to a corner, increasing the transparency of the operation image, and changing the display color of the operation image May be set.

  140 (a), 140 (b), and 140 (c) change the contents of the image display of the image display device 31 in the modification in which the display mode change finger command is set in step S1610-12. Is a diagram illustrating an example of In this modification, as shown in FIG. 140A, when the image control board 150 is displaying a password input image (information input request image) as a display image of the image display device 31, the effect control board 120 is displayed. If the received command is a predetermined command (a magnet detection error command in the example of FIG. 140 (a)), the image display mode is changed such that the size of the password input image is reduced and moved to the lower left corner. The display area of the image corresponding to the received command is made open at the center. Further, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the image control board 150 is displaying a game history image as a display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is a predetermined command (FIG. 140). In the example of (a), if it is a magnet detection error command, the display mode of the image is changed such that the size of the game history image is reduced and moved to the lower left corner, and the image corresponding to the received command is Make the display area empty. Further, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), when the image control board 150 is displaying the game method explanation moving image as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is a predetermined command ( In the case of the magnet detection error command in the example of FIG. 140 (a), the display mode of the image is changed so that the size of the game method explanation moving image is reduced and moved to the lower left corner, Free up the display area of the corresponding image.

  Here, the processing in steps S1610-7, S1610-9, and S1610-11 in the case where the image to be deleted is a character selection image, a music selection image, or a volume adjustment image will be described in detail.

  As shown in the example of FIG. 123 (b), the character in the selected state in the selected character display column of the character selection image is changed from the character at the time of display of the character selection image to another character (in the example of FIG. 123 (b) , Character B (character counter = 01)-> character E (character counter = 05)), and after this change, before the selection and determination operation (operation to press the effect button 35) is performed, the variation start command is received If YES in step S1610-7, the character setting information in the character setting information storage area immediately before the display of the character selection image (in the example of FIG. 123B, the character setting information of character B) is maintained without being updated. .

  In this case, an erase designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the subsequent step S1610-12, and an effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the fluctuation effect pattern determination process (FIG. 101) of step S1621. When these commands are transmitted to the image control board 150, the character selection image is erased in the image display device 31, and at the same time the variation display of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R starts.

  Also, as shown in the example of FIG. 124 (b), the music in the selected state in the selected music display column of the music selection image is changed from the music at the display time of the music selection image to another music (FIG. 124 (b) In the example, music 30 (music counter = 29) → music 40 (music counter = 39), the change start command is received after this change and before the selection and determination operation (operation to press the effect button 35) is performed In this case, in step S1610-9, the music setting information in the music setting information storage area is updated based on the music shop setting information in the music shop setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c (the music 20 in the example of FIG. 124 (b)). .

  In this case, an erase designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the subsequent step S1610-12, and an effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the fluctuation effect pattern determination process (FIG. 101) of step S1621. When these commands are transmitted to the image control board 150, the music selection image is erased in the image display device 31, and at the same time the variation display of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R starts.

  Also, as shown in the example of FIG. 125 (b), the selected volume (number of black level markers) in the volume adjustment image indicator is changed from the volume at the display point of the volume adjustment image to another volume (see FIG. In the example of 125 (b), the volume is changed to 4 (volume counter = 04) → volume 8 (volume counter = 08), and after this change, the selection and determination operation (operation to press the effect button 35) is performed. If the fluctuation start command has been received before, in step S1610-9, the volume setting information storage area is selected based on the selected volume at the time of reception of the fluctuation start command (volume 8 in the example of FIG. 125 (b)). Update volume setting information.

  In this case, the deletion designation command of the volume adjustment image is set in the transmission buffer in the subsequent step S1610-12, and the effect pattern designation command is set in the transmission buffer in the variation rendering pattern determination process (FIG. 101) of step S1621. When these commands are transmitted to the image control board 150, the volume adjustment image is erased in the image display device 31, and simultaneously with this erasure, the variable display of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R starts.

  Here, as described above, the character shop setting information of the character shop setting information storage area, the music shop setting information of the music shop setting information storage area, and the volume shop setting information of the volume shop setting information storage area It is set by the shop setting operation during display of the shop setting image (FIG. 58) in the initialization process of. On the other hand, the initial value of the setting information is stored in advance in the factory setting information storage area, which is an area different from the store setting information storage area in the sub RAM 120c, and a predetermined command is received before the selection confirmation operation. The setting information may be updated using this initial value.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), a predetermined command (a variation start command in the example of FIG. 126 (b)) is performed before the selection and determination operation (operation of pressing the effect button 35) is performed during display of the volume setting information. When it is received, the initial value of the volume factory setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c may be stored as new volume setting information in the volume setting information storage area and the volume adjustment image may be deleted.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing details of the change-time image switching control process (step S1623 in FIG. 101). In FIG. 141, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the edit operation flag is set in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1623). Operation image (Operation main image, character selection image, music selection image, volume adjustment image, new game start image, new game QR code (registered trademark) image, password input image (information input request image) ) If the game end image, the game end QR code (registered trademark) image, the game history image, or the game method explanation moving image) is being displayed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and it is not being displayed. For example, the determination result of this step is "No". When the edit operation flag is set (S1623: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1623-2. When the edit operation flag is not set (S1623: No), the image switching control process at the start of the current change is ended.

  In step S 1623-2, the sub CPU 120 a sets an erasing designation command for erasing the operation image in the transmission buffer. Next, the sub CPU 120a clears the edit operation flag in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c and the customer waiting flag in the customer waiting flag storage area (S1623-3), and after clearing the flag, this variation start switching control processing Finish.

  The deletion designation command set in the transmission buffer in step S1623-2 is combined with the effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer in the fluctuation effect pattern determination process (FIG. 101) in the previous step S1621, and the data output process in step S1900 Are sent to the image control board 150. When these commands are transmitted to the image control board 150, the image is erased in the image display device 31, and at the same time the variation display of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R starts.

  Describing in more detail, for example, as shown in FIG. 142, when the image control board 150 is displaying a password input image (information input request image) as a display image of the image display device 31, the effect control board 120 If the received command is a change start command, the password input image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the password input image invisible, and the display of the change effect image corresponding to the change start command is started.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 143, when the image control board 150 is displaying a game history image as a display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is a change start command The game history image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game history image invisible, and the display of the fluctuation effect image corresponding to the fluctuation start command is started.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 144, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game method explanation moving image as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is the change start command. If there is, the game method explanation moving image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game method explanation moving image invisible, and the display of the change effect image corresponding to the change start command is started.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the details of the special game start image switching control process (step S1632 in FIG. 101). In FIG. 145, the sub CPU 120a checks whether the edit operation flag is set in the edit operation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c (S1632-1). Operation image (operation main image, character selection image, music selection image, volume adjustment image, new game start image, password input image (information input request image), new game QR code (registered trademark) at the time of reception of the special game start command ) If the image, the game end image, the game end QR code (registered trademark) image, the game history image, or the game method explanation moving image) is being displayed, the determination result of this step is "Yes", and the display is in progress. If not, the determination result of this step is "No". When the edit operation flag is set (S1632-1: Yes), the sub CPU 120a proceeds to step S1632-2. If the edit operation flag is not set (S1632-1: No), the image switching control process at the start of the special game is ended.

  In step S1632-2, the sub CPU 120a sets an erasure designation command for erasing the operation image in the transmission buffer. Next, the sub CPU 120a clears the edit activation flag of the edit activation flag storage area of the sub RAM 120c and the customer waiting flag of the customer waiting flag storage area (S1632-3), and after clearing the flag, this special game start switching control End the process.

  The deletion designation command of the operation image set in the transmission buffer in step S1632-2 is used together with the effect pattern specification command set in the transmission buffer in the hit start rendering pattern determination process (FIG. 101) in the previous step S1631. Is sent to the image control board 150 in the data output process of When these commands are transmitted to the image control board 150, the image is erased in the image display device 31, and at the same time the variation display of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R starts.

  Describing in more detail, for example, as shown in FIG. 146, when the image control board 150 is displaying a password input image (information input request image) as a display image of the image display device 31, the effect control board 120 If the received command is a special game start command, the password input image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the password input image invisible. The display of the special game effect image corresponding to the special game start command is started.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 147, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game history image as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is the special game start command In this case, the game history image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game history image invisible, and the display of the special game effect image corresponding to the special game start command is started.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the command received by the effect control board 120 is the special game start command while displaying the game method explanation moving image as the display image of the image display device 31, the image display In the device 31, the game method explanation moving image is erased to make the game method explanation moving image invisible, and the display of the special game effect moving image corresponding to the special game start command is started.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to the present embodiment, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the gaming machine 1 can be smoothly performed.

Second Embodiment
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first embodiment, the contents of the record of the vibration detection error command in the command execution mode determination table are exactly the same as the contents of the record of the magnet detection error command which is the same fraud occurrence command. However, in the present embodiment, the content of the vibration detection error command in the command execution mode determination table is different from that of the magnet detection error command, and an error occurs while displaying the game standby image, the menu image or the setting image. In this case, an individual command execution mode is determined according to the type of fraud. In the first embodiment, when the sub CPU 120a receives the power on designation command or the power recovery designation command in the initialization process of the effect control board 120, the sub CPU 120a does not refer to the command execution mode determination table, but the command itself It was decided whether or not to carry out the On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution mode of the power on specification command and the power recovery specification command in the initialization process of the effect control board 120 is determined based on the command execution mode determination table.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing details of special command analysis processing (S1077 in FIG. 34) during game standby in the second embodiment. FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1077-8 of FIG. 145.

  Unlike the game standby special command analysis process (first embodiment) of FIGS. 35 and 36, the game standby special command analysis process of FIG. 149 is different from the game standby special command analysis process (first embodiment). The process immediately proceeds to step S1077-8 to perform command execution mode determination processing.

  In the record of “vibration detection error command” in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is “move reduction”, the restoration of the image is necessary The data indicating no is "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "center", the data showing the necessity of stopping background music is "No stopping", the necessity of restoring background music The indicated data is "no return". In the record of “vibration detection error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “no erasure”, the data indicating the necessity of image restoration Is "with return", the data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data indicating whether it is necessary to stop the background music is "without stop", the data showing that it is necessary to restore the background music is " There is no return.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 151, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a vibration detection error command, the image display mode is changed such that the size of the game standby image is reduced and moved to the lower left corner. To display a message image corresponding to the vibration detection error command. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the vibration detection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the vibration detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the vibration detection error command and restores the game standby image to the original display mode. . In this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the vibration detection error command is stopped.

  Also, in the record of "power on designation command" in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of image deletion is "erased", and the image is restored. The data indicating the necessity of "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping the background music "Stop", the background music need to be restored The data indicating no is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 152, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 152, power on specification during display of the game standby image) When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the power on designation command, the game standby image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game standby image invisible and the power on at the center of the screen A message image (character image of "power on") corresponding to the designated command is displayed, and the output of background music during activation is stopped in the audio output device 32.

  Also, in the record of "power restoration specification command" in the table of FIG. 150, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "O", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "erasing", restoration of the image The data indicating the necessity of "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping the background music "Stop", the background music need to be restored The data indicating no is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 153, when the image control board 150 is displaying the game standby image as the display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the power recovery specification command, the game standby image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the game standby image invisible and also the power recovery to the center of the screen The message image (character image of “power recovery”) corresponding to the designated command is displayed, and the output of the background sound during activation is stopped in the voice output device 32.

  FIGS. 154 and 155 are flowcharts showing the details of the special command analysis process (S1093 in FIG. 55) during menu image display control in the second embodiment. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table referred to in step S1093-8 of FIG.

  Unlike the menu image display control shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 and FIG. 67, the special command analysis processing in menu image display control in FIGS. 154 and 155 differs from the special command analysis processing in the menu image display control (first embodiment). If there is a special command received from the control board 110, the process immediately proceeds to step S1093-8 to perform command execution mode determination processing.

  In the record of “vibration detection error command” in the table of FIG. 156, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “reduction movement”, and the restoration of the image is necessary The data indicating no is "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "center", the data showing necessity of operation restriction is "-", the data showing necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is "-", Data indicating whether the background music needs to be stopped is "no stop", and data indicating whether the background music needs to be restored is "no return". In the record of “vibration detection error cancellation command”, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “〇”, the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is “no erasure”, the data indicating the necessity of image restoration Is "with return", data indicating the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", data indicating the necessity of the operation restriction is "-", data indicating the necessity of the operation restriction release is "-", Data indicating the necessity of stopping background music is "no stop", and data indicating the necessity of restoring background music is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 157, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception is the vibration detection error command, the display mode of the image is changed such that the size of the menu image is reduced and moved to the upper left corner, and the vibration is detected at the center of the screen Display the message image corresponding to the error command. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the vibration detection error command is output. When the command received by the effect control board 120 after that is the vibration detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the vibration detection error command, and restores the menu image to the original display mode. In this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the vibration detection error command is stopped.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 158, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is a vibration detection error command, the image display mode is changed such that the size of the store setting image is reduced and the image is moved to the upper left corner. To display a message image corresponding to the vibration detection error command. Also, in this case, the output of background music during activation in the audio output device 32 is maintained, and a message sound corresponding to the vibration detection error command is output. If the command received by the effect control board 120 thereafter is a vibration detection error cancellation command, the image control board 150 deletes the message image corresponding to the vibration detection error command, and restores the store setting image to the original display mode. . In this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the vibration detection error command is stopped.

  Also, in the record of “power on designation command” in the table of FIG. 156, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is necessary is “〇”, data indicating whether or not image deletion is necessary is “erased”, and image restoration The data indicating the necessity of "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of operation restriction is "-", the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is shown The data is "-", the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "with a stop", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception is the power on designation command, the menu image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the menu image invisible, and the power on designation command corresponds to the center of the screen The message image (character image of "power on") is displayed, and the background music during activation is stopped in the audio output device 32.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. 160, power on specification during display of the shop setting image) When the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the power on designation command, the store setting image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the store setting image invisible and the power on at the center of the screen The message image (character image of "power on") corresponding to the designated command is displayed, and the background music during activation is stopped in the voice output device 32.

  Moreover, in the record of "power restoration specification command" in the table of FIG. 156, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "o", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "erasing", restoration of the image The data indicating the necessity of "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of operation restriction is "-", the necessity of cancellation of operation restriction is shown The data is "-", the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be stopped is "with a stop", and the data indicating whether or not the background music needs to be restored is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, when the image control board 150 is displaying a menu image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. When the command received by the effect control board 120 before receiving is the power recovery specification command, the menu image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the menu image invisible and a message corresponding to the power recovery specification command is displayed at the center of the screen An image (a character image of "power recovery") is displayed, and the sound output device 32 stops the background music being activated.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 162, when the image control board 150 is displaying a shop setting image as a display image of the image display device 31 (in the example of FIG. If the command received by the effect control board 120 before the reception of the command is the power restoration specification command, the shop setting image is erased in the image display device 31 to make the shop setting image invisible and the power restoration specification command at the center of the screen And the corresponding message image (character image of "power recovery") is displayed, and the background music during activation is stopped in the voice output device 32.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to this embodiment, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the gaming machine 1 can be performed more smoothly.

Third Embodiment
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first and second embodiments, in the initialization process of the effect control board 120, after the sub CPU 120a displays the menu image, whether the display image at the time of displaying the command is a menu image or a shop setting image, or RTC Regardless of the setting image, the eco mode setting image, the debug mode setting image, or the processing state presentation image of the debugging process, the command execution mode is determined with reference to the common command execution mode determination table. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a unique command execution mode determination table to be referred to during display of the processing state presentation image of the debugging process is provided, and the sub CPU 120a determines this command execution mode determination table when receiving a command in debugging process. Refer to to determine the command execution mode.

  The processing content of the initialization processing of the effect control board 120 in the present embodiment is the same as that of the second embodiment. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing a command execution mode determination table to be referred to when a special command or a game command is received during display of the processing state presentation screen of the debugging process in the present embodiment. In this table, data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is “x” for all of the special command and the game command.

  More specifically, in the record of “variation start command” in the table of FIG. 163, data indicating whether or not execution of the command itself is required is “x”, and data indicating whether or not image deletion is needed is “not erased”, The data indicating the necessity of image restoration is "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing necessity of stopping background music is "No stop", background music The data indicating the necessity of return is "no return".

  Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, when the image control board 150 is displaying the processing state presentation image of the debugging process as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 starts to change If it is a command, the display of the processing state presentation image of the debugging process in the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the message image corresponding to the fluctuation start command is restricted. Also, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the fluctuation start command is restricted. That is, when the change start command is received while the processing state presentation image of the debugging process is displayed, the change start command is ignored.

  In the "special game start command" record of the table in FIG. 163, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of erasing the image is "no erasure", and the image is restored The data indicating the necessity of "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping background music is "No stop", the background music needs recovery The data indicating no is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, when the image control board 150 is displaying the processing state presentation image of the debugging process as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is a special game If it is the start command, the display of the processing state presentation image of the debugging process in the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the message image corresponding to the special game start command is restricted. Also, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the special game start command is restricted. That is, when the special game start command is received during display of the processing state presentation image of the debugging process, the special game start command is ignored.

  Moreover, in the record of "power on designation command" in the table of FIG. 163, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "no deletion", restoration of the image The data indicating the necessity of "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping background music is "No stop", the background music needs recovery The data indicating no is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, when the image control board 150 is displaying the processing state presentation image of the debugging process as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is powered on. If it is a designation command, the display of the processing state presentation image of the debugging processing in the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the message image corresponding to the power on designation command is restricted. Also, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the power on designation command is restricted. That is, when the power-on designation command is received while displaying the processing state presentation image of the debugging process, the power-on designation command is ignored.

  Moreover, in the record of "power restoration specification command" in the table of FIG. 163, the data indicating the necessity of execution of the command itself is "x", the data indicating the necessity of deletion of the image is "no deletion", restoration of the image The data indicating the necessity of "No return", the data showing the display position of the image corresponding to the command is "-", the data showing the necessity of stopping background music is "No stop", the background music needs recovery The data indicating no is "no return".

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, when the image control board 150 is displaying the processing state presentation image of the debugging process as the display image of the image display device 31, the command received by the effect control board 120 is restored. If the command is a designated command, the display of the processing state presentation image of the debugging process in the image display device 31 is maintained, and the display of the message image corresponding to the power recovery designated command is restricted. Also, in this case, the output of the message voice corresponding to the power recovery designation command is restricted. That is, when the power supply recovery designation command is received while the processing state presentation image of the debugging process is displayed, the power supply recovery designation command is ignored.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to this embodiment, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the gaming machine 1 can be performed more smoothly.

Fourth Embodiment
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the first to third embodiments, the operation to adjust the level marker in the volume adjustment image (operation to press the left cursor key 39C or the right cursor key 39D) and the selection and confirmation operation (operation to press the effect button 35) are performed. The volume setting information is to be updated only after the selection and confirmation operation is performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the volume setting information is updated when the operation of adjusting the level marker is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the contents of the customer waiting operation control process, the selection button determination process, and the customer waiting command reception control process in the timer interrupt process of the effect control board 120 are different from those in the first to third embodiments. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting operation control process (a part corresponding to steps S1807-12 to S1807-20 (FIG. 105)) according to the present embodiment. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a selection button determination process (a part corresponding to steps S1807-60 to S1807-69 (FIG. 127)) of the present embodiment. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing control processing at the time of waiting for a customer waiting command according to the present embodiment.

  In the customer waiting operation control process of FIG. 168, there is no process of step S1807-19 in the customer waiting operation control process (FIG. 105) of the first to third embodiments. Therefore, when an operation to press the effect button 35 is performed during display of the volume adjustment image, the process proceeds from step S1807-18: Yes to step S1807-20, and the edit operation flag is cleared.

  In the selection button determination process of FIG. 169, unlike the selection button determination process (FIG. 127) of the first to third embodiments, there is a process of steps S1807-69 'after steps S1807-69. In this step S1807-69 ', the sub CPU 120a updates the volume setting information of the volume setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c in accordance with the data after the updating of the volume counter. Therefore, when an operation to press the left cursor key 39C (an operation to decrease the volume of the volume indicator) or an operation to press the right cursor key 39D (an operation to increase the volume of the volume indicator) is performed while displaying the volume adjustment image, From step S1807-68 through steps S1807-69, the process proceeds to step S1807-69 'where the volume setting information is updated.

  In the customer waiting command reception control process of FIG. 170, the processes of steps S1610-10 and S1610-11 in the customer waiting command reception control process (FIG. 129) of the first to third embodiments are not included. For this reason, if a special command is received during display of the volume adjustment image, the process proceeds from step S1601-1: No, step S1610-6: No → step S1610-8: No, and proceeds to step S1610-12, and the volume adjustment image is displayed. An erase designation command for erasing is set in the transmission buffer.

  Explaining in more detail, as shown in the example of FIG. 171 (a), the volume (number of black level markers) of the selected state in the volume indicator of the volume adjustment image is the volume at the display point of the volume adjustment image (FIG. In the example of a), when the operation of changing from the volume 8 (volume counter = 08) (in the example of FIG. 171 (a), the operation of pressing the left cursor key 39C twice) is performed, In step S1807-69 ', the volume setting information in the volume setting information storage area of the sub RAM 120c is rewritten to the volume after the change every time the operation is performed (in the example of FIG. 171 (a), volume 8 → volume 7 ( First time), volume 7 → volume 6 (second time)). Thereafter, when the selection and confirmation operation (operation to press the effect button 35) is performed, the edit operation flag is cleared in step S1807-20 of FIG. 169, and the customer waiting operation control process of FIG. After the process of step S1807-5 (FIG. 104) in S1807), the display image of the image display device 31 returns to the operation main image.

  As shown in the example of FIG. 171 (b), when the change start command is received before the selection and determination operation (operation to press the effect button 35) during display of the volume adjustment image, the volume setting information storage area at that time is received. While the volume setting information of the volume setting information is maintained, the deletion designation command of the volume adjustment image is set in the transmission buffer in step S1610-12 in FIG. 170, and the effect pattern designation command in the subsequent variation effect pattern determination process (FIG. 101) in step S1621. Is set in the transmission buffer. When these commands are transmitted to the image control board 150, the volume adjustment image is erased in the image display device 31, and simultaneously with this erasure, the variable display of the left symbol 36L, the middle symbol 36C and the right symbol 36R starts.

  The above is the details of the present embodiment. According to this embodiment, cooperation between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 120 in the gaming machine 1 can be performed more smoothly.

As mentioned above, although 1st-4th embodiment of this invention was described, you may add the following deformation | transformation to this embodiment.
(1) In the first to fourth embodiments, the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine. However, the present invention may be applied to a slot game machine.

(2) In S1077-12, S1078-5, S1093-12, and S1074-5 in the first to fourth embodiments, an erase designation command instructing deletion of a display image (game standby image, menu image, setting image) Instead of this, a command may be set to draw another image such as a single color image in a layer above the drawing layer of the display image. As long as it is a command that can make a display image invisible, it may send a command instructing deletion of the display image itself, or a command instructing to overwrite another image on the display image. .

(3) In the first to fourth embodiments, the display position of the message image corresponding to the command when the command is sent from the main control board 110 to the sub CPU 120a while the game standby image or the menu image is displayed is a screen When the display of the game standby image or the menu image is maintained and the image corresponding to the command is displayed in the upper right corner, which is either the center or the upper right corner of the screen, the operation restriction is not performed. However, the display position where this operation restriction is not performed does not have to be at the upper right corner. The lower right corner, the upper left corner, or the lower left corner may be used as long as the position does not overlap the display image of the game standby image or the menu image.

(4) In the first to fourth embodiments, the main character can be selected from six types of characters A, B, C, D, E and F, and the normal music is music 1 to music It is possible to select from 60 types of 60, and the volume can be selected from 12 types of volume 0 to volume 11. However, the selection range of the character may be one to five, or seven or more. The selection range of the normal music may be 61 types or more. The selection range of the volume may be 13 or more.

(5) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, it is possible to select music that is changing during normal times. However, music in the special game may be selected.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine, 2 ... Game board, 14 ... 1st starting opening, 14a ... 1st starting opening detection switch, 15 ... 2nd starting opening, 15a ... 2nd starting opening detection switch, 16 ... 1st big winning opening, 16a: first large winning opening detection switch, 17: second large winning opening, 17a: second large winning opening detection switch, 20: first special symbol display device, 21: second special symbol display device, 31: image display Apparatus 110 main control board 110a main CPU 110b main ROM 110c main RAM 120 effect control board 120a sub CPU 120b sub ROM 120c sub RAM 150 image control board 150a ... host CPU, 150b ... host RAM, 150c ... host ROM, 151 ... CGROM, 153 ... VRAM, 2000 ... VDP.

Claims (1)

Main control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and generating a plurality of types of commands including commands corresponding to the progress of the game;
Rendering means for displaying at least a rendering image;
Operation means,
A game control device that receives a command generated by the main control means and effects control means for controlling the effect means based on at least the received command generated by the main control means;
The effect control means is
A first storage means for storing setting values relating to a predetermined setting, a second storage means for storing initial values of the setting values, and a plurality of candidate images that can be distinguished from those in a selected state Display control means for displaying a setting image shown in a display mode on the effect means, and changing a candidate image of the selected state in accordance with a selection operation of the operation means,
The effect control means is
While the selection confirmation operation of the operation means is performed during display of the setting image, while updating the setting value of the first storage means based on the setting value candidate of the selection state at the time of the operation ,
In the operation of adjusting the level marker in the volume adjustment image, the volume setting information is updated when the operation of adjusting the level marker is performed,
During display of the setting image, when a predetermined command is received regardless of whether the command is generated by the main control unit before the selection and confirmation operation is performed, the second storage unit gaming machine, wherein the benzalkonium be stored an initial value as a new set value in the first storage means.